JP6321715B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and a parrot machine that allows a player to play a game using a game medium and that can be given a value based on a predetermined grant condition being satisfied. .

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game media are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Also, when a game medium is inserted, a predetermined number of bets are set, multiple types of symbols are rotated by operating the operation lever, and a combination of stop symbols is specified when the symbols are stopped by operating the stop button There are cases where a predetermined number of premium game media are paid out to the player. Also, when a predetermined number of bets are set according to the number of game media taken in, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated by operating the operation lever, and the symbols are stopped when the symbols are stopped by operating the stop button. When the combination becomes a combination of specific symbols, a predetermined number of game media may be paid out to the player.

  Game progress in the gaming machine is controlled by game control means such as a microcomputer. If the payout control means for controlling the payout of game media is provided separately from the game control means, the progress of the game is controlled by the game control means, so the number of prize game media based on the winning is determined by the game control means. The determined control command indicating the number of premium game media is transmitted to the payout control means. Then, the payout control means performs a process of paying out the prize game medium based on the winning based on the control command from the game control means.

JP 2007-275239 A (paragraph 0037 and the like, FIG. 6) JP 2007-054438 A (paragraph 0403 etc.)

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the game control microcomputer side can recognize the control state of the grant control microcomputer side.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a player can play a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and a predetermined grant condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has won a prize opening). ) Based on a game control microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) and a value control microcomputer for controlling the value addition ( For example, the game control microcomputer includes a payout control microcomputer 370), and the game control microcomputer outputs a request signal to the grant control microcomputer and a predetermined grant condition is established. A grant amount storage means for storing grant amount data capable of specifying the amount of value to be given, and a grant amount data stored in the grant amount storage means. And a grant amount output means for outputting a signal capable of specifying the amount of value to be given to the grant control microcomputer based on the request signal. The grant control microcomputer outputs the request signal output by the request signal output means. A response signal output means for outputting a response signal (for example, connection OK command) to the game control microcomputer based on the input of (for example, a part for executing steps S7415 and S74208 in the payout control microcomputer 370); Based on the signal output by the grant amount output means, the grant control means for giving the value of the amount specified by the signal, and the grant shortage that the assigned value is insufficient for the amount of value to be given Determining whether an abnormality has occurred and whether there has been an over-giving abnormality in which the assigned value is excessive Includes a normal determining means, a response signal output means, when a predetermined error including the case where it is determined that an abnormality has occurred is generated by the abnormality determining means, the game control microcomputer is the predetermined error a recognizable data, set by varying the predetermined bit of the response signal, the error signal output means for outputting a response signal to which the setting has been made to the game control microcomputer, characterized in including it. With such a configuration, the game control microcomputer side can recognize the control state of the grant control microcomputer side.

  The game control microcomputer is a grant that can specify the amount of value to be given (for example, the number of prize balls) based on the fact that a predetermined grant condition has been established (for example, a game ball has won a prize opening) Amount to be given based on a given amount storage means (for example, a prize ball command output counter) for storing amount data (for example, a count value of a prize ball command output counter) and a given amount data stored in the given amount storage means Grant amount signal output means (for example, a part for executing step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560) for outputting a grant amount signal (for example, a prize ball number command) capable of specifying the amount of value to the grant control microcomputer; Based on the output of the applied amount signal by the applied amount signal output means, the connection confirmation signal is output by the connection confirmation signal output means. Stop means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the prize ball number command in step S52305 of the prize ball transmission process 2 and then shifts to the prize ball transmission process 1 for transmitting the connection confirmation command). Without transmitting the connection confirmation command by shifting to the prize ball receipt confirmation process (see step S52306), for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is connected only in the prize ball transmission process 1 shown in FIG. A process of transmitting a confirmation command (see step S5211), and a process of transmitting a connection confirmation command is not performed in the prize ball reception confirmation process shown in FIG. The grant control microcomputer is identified by the grant amount signal output by the grant amount signal output means. Grant control means for executing grant control for granting the amount of unassigned value (for example, the process of step S75113 in the grant control microcomputer 370 is executed to start the payout motor 289, and the payout motor in step S756) The predetermined period determination means determines whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed using a measurement timer (for example, a prize ball process timer) for measuring the predetermined period (for example, a portion where the control process is executed) The game control microcomputer 560 sets the connection confirmation time 1 (1 second) in the prize ball process timer in step S5226, and then executes the process of step S52313). The game control microcomputer further provides grant control. When the execution of the measurement is finished, the measurement timer resets the predetermined period and Measurement timer starting means for starting measurement control (for example, after setting connection confirmation time 1 (1 second) in the prize ball process timer in step S52505 in the game control microcomputer 560, the process proceeds to prize ball transmission processing 2 and step A portion for starting the measurement of S52313), and when the execution of the grant control is finished, the grant amount data judging means for judging whether or not the grant amount data is stored in the grant amount storage means (for example, the game control micro) And a grant amount signal output means is a grant amount data determination means. The portion that executes step S52301 when step S52503 is executed in step S52503 in the computer 560 and step S52504 is executed and the process proceeds to the prize ball transmission process 2). When it is determined that the grant amount data is stored in the grant amount storage means, Based on the given amount data stored in the given amount storage means, a new given amount signal is output to the giving control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that Y is determined in step S52301). Step S52305 is executed to transmit a new prize ball number command), and the connection confirmation signal output means determines that the given amount data is not stored in the given amount storage means by the given amount data judging means. Based on the time-out of the measurement timer reset by the measurement timer starting means, a new connection confirmation signal is output to the grant control microcomputer (for example, Y in step S52313 in the game control microcomputer 560). The process proceeds to prize ball transmission processing 1 and step S5 11 to run) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interval period between the end of execution of the granting control and the output of a new connection confirmation signal, and processing at the end of the execution of the granting control is concentrated. It is possible to prevent the connection confirmation signal from being lost.

  The game control microcomputer is a grant that can specify the amount of value to be given (for example, the number of prize balls) based on the fact that the grant condition by the game has been established (for example, the game ball has won a prize opening) Amount to be given based on a given amount storage means (for example, a prize ball command output counter) for storing amount data (for example, a count value of a prize ball command output counter) and a given amount data stored in the given amount storage means Grant amount signal output means (for example, a part for executing step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560) for outputting a grant amount signal (for example, a prize ball number command) capable of specifying the amount of value to the grant control microcomputer; The application control microcomputer includes at least an application amount signal output by the application amount signal output means. The grant control means for executing grant control for granting the specified amount of unassigned value (for example, the processing of step S75113 in the payout control microcomputer 370 is executed, the payout motor 289 is activated, and in step S756) (Part where the payout motor control process is executed), and data (for example, an application excess amount exceeding the amount specified by the application amount signal and an application insufficient amount not satisfying the amount specified by the application amount signal (for example, , The cumulative update means for cumulatively updating (the count value of the payout number abnormality counter) (for example, the portion executing steps S7503, S75320, S75325, and S75335 in the payout control microcomputer 370) and the cumulative update means. The data is a specific value (for example, a predetermined payout number abnormality error judgment value (for example, , 2000)), a portion for determining the grant error (eg, Y in step S7504 in the payout control microcomputer 370 and executing step S7505. Y determined in step S75321) A portion that executes S75322. A portion that determines Y in step S7725 and executes step S7726), and the response signal output means can recognize that it has been determined as the grant error by the grant error determination means To output a response signal to the game control microcomputer (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes the processing of steps S7414 and S74207, and as shown in FIG. Set error and send) It may be configured. According to such a configuration, a grant error that may occur due to cheating can be recognized on the game control microcomputer side, and appropriate processing for the grant error can be made. Can be strengthened.

  The gaming machine detects a value addition (for example, award ball payout) based on establishment of a condition for granting by the game (for example, a game ball has won a winning opening), and sends a detection signal to the microcomputer for giving control. Provided with a grant detection means for output (for example, a payout number count switch 301), the game control microcomputer grants based on the fact that a grant condition for the game has been established (for example, a game ball has won a prize opening). A grant amount storage means (for example, a prize ball command output counter) for storing grant amount data (for example, a count value of a prize ball command output counter) capable of specifying an amount of value (for example, the number of prize balls); Based on the grant amount data stored in the amount storage means, a grant amount signal (for example, a prize ball number command) for specifying the amount of value to be given is used for grant control. Grant amount signal output means for outputting to the microcomputer (for example, the part executing step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560) and data indicating the amount of value to be added at the timing when the grant amount signal is output (for example, Update means (for example, a part for executing step S52308 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the grant control microcomputer receives a detection signal from the grant detection means. A given amount signal (for example, prize ball information) indicating detection of value addition to the game control microcomputer based on a predetermined number of times (for example, prize ball information output determination value (10 times)). ) Output amount signal output means (for example, a payout control microcomputer) And a grant control means (for example, a grant control means for granting an unassigned value amount specified by the grant amount signal output by the grant amount signal output means). The game control microcomputer further includes a part for executing the process of step S75113 in the payout control microcomputer 370 to activate the payout motor 289 and executing the payout motor control process in step S756). Based on the output of the grant amount signal by the grant amount signal output means, reverse update means for updating the data in the reverse direction (for example, the part that executes step S5311 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the data is predetermined. Threshold value (for example, prize ball shortage judgment value (501). Prize ball excess judgment value) (0)) and an abnormal state determination means for determining that the state is abnormal (for example, a part for executing steps S52309 and S5312 in the game control microcomputer 560). May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively prevent an illegal act caused by disturbing communication between the game control microcomputer and the grant control microcomputer.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view which shows the front surface of the game board in the state which removed the glass door frame. It is the rear view which looked at the gaming machine from the back. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board and a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board to the effect control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the transmission part of a serial communication circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the receiving part of a serial communication circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data format of the data which a serial communication circuit transmits / receives with the microcomputer mounted in each control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a baud rate register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control register A and communication format setting data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control register B and interrupt request setting data. It is a figure which shows the example of status register A and status confirmation data. It is a figure which shows the example of status register B and status confirmation data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control register C and error interrupt request setting data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data register with which a serial communication circuit is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table memory for jackpot determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the output port in a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in a game control means. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output with respect to the payout control means from a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control means and a payout control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the error information set to a connection OK command and a prize ball preparation command. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a control signal and a control command. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. FIG. 6 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission / reception between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer during a prize ball operation. FIG. 6 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission / reception between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer during a prize ball operation. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission / reception between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer when a winning ball operation cannot be executed immediately. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing signal transmission and reception between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer during normal operation. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer when an error occurs during a winning ball. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer when a communication error occurs during connection confirmation. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer when a communication error occurs during award ball number notification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball command output counter addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball transmission processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball connection confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball transmission process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball receipt confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball completion | finish confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball counter subtraction process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a frame state output process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each 2 byte buffer formed in RAM used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of a switch process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in a payout control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the input port in a payout control means. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication process. It is a flowchart which shows a main control command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a main control connection confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows main control communication normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows main control communication normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during main control communication. It is a flowchart which shows the process during main control communication. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication end process. It is a flowchart which shows a main control transmission command conversion process. It is a flowchart which shows payout control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the payout start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor stop waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the kind of error, and the display of LED for an error display. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. FIG. 11 is a front view of a slot machine as a modification of the gaming machine according to the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural examples, such as a game control board (main board) and an effect control board, in a slot machine.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front of the game board. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device (decorative symbol display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display portions each variably displaying an effect decorative symbol (effect symbol). The effect display device 9 includes, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The effect display device 9 performs variable display of the effect symbol as a symbol for decoration (for effect) during the variable display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The effect display device 9 that performs variable display of effect symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  Below the effect display device 9, four special symbol hold memory indicators 18 are provided for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ing. The special symbol reservation storage display 18 displays up to four reservation storage numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol hold storage display 18 increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is a start winning in the start winning opening 14. Then, each time the special symbol display 8 starts variable display, the special symbol hold storage indicator 18 reduces the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 (that is, turns off one LED). Specifically, the special symbol hold storage display 18 shifts the lighting state each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8. In this example, the upper limit number (up to 4) is provided for the number of starting memories by winning to the start winning opening 14, but the upper limit number may be four or more.

  A special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the top of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display a larger number of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol. Further, the effect display device 9 performs variable display of the effect symbol as a symbol for decoration (for effect) during the variable display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8.

  Below the effect display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15 that forms a start winning opening 14 is provided. The variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be able to open and close the wings, and when the wings are open, the game ball is likely to win a prize (open state), and when the wings are not open (closed). The game ball becomes difficult to win (closed state). The winning ball that has entered the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. The first winning prize opening may be provided directly above the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be used as the second starting prize opening.

  Below the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 using an opening / closing plate that is controlled to be opened by a solenoid 21 in a specific gaming state (big hit state) is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is a means for opening and closing the big winning opening. The winning ball that has won the special variable winning ball device 20 and led to the back of the game board 6 is detected by the count switch 23.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting left and right lamps (designs can be visually recognized when lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit at the end of variable display, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, the normal symbol start memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29 and 30, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 29 and 30 is detected by winning hole switches 29a and 30a, respectively. Each of the winning ports 29 and 30 constitutes a winning area provided on the game board 6 as an area for accepting game media and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning. In addition, it may be configured to detect with a detection switch that a game ball has passed a predetermined area (for example, a gate), instead of the configuration in which the game ball won in each winning opening 29, 30 is detected with a prize switch. Around the left and right of the game area 7, there are provided decorative lamps 25 blinking and displayed during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for absorbing a game ball that has not won a prize. Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine. In this embodiment, the case where the light emitter provided in the gaming machine is configured by using a lamp or an LED is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. You may make it comprise all the provided light-emitting bodies using LED.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a prize ball lamp that is turned on during the prize ball payout is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a supply ball is provided in the vicinity of the top frame lamp 28a. There is a ball-out lamp that illuminates when it runs out. Note that the award ball lamp and the out-of-ball lamp are controlled to be turned on by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board when the award ball is being paid out or when the out-of-ball is detected. Further, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as “card unit”) 50 that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The card unit 50 includes, for example, a usable display lamp that indicates whether or not the card unit 50 is in a usable state, a connection table direction indicator that indicates which side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to the card unit, and a card unit. When checking the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card is inserted in the card, the card insertion slot into which the card as a recording medium is inserted, and the card reader / writer mechanism provided on the back of the card insertion slot A card unit lock for releasing the card unit is provided.

  A game ball launched from the ball striking device by the player's operation enters the game area 7 through the hit ball rail, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the start winning opening 14 and is detected by the start opening switch 14a, the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 starts variable display (variation) if the variable display of the symbol can be started. If the variable display of the symbol cannot be started, the number of reserved memories is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 8 stops when a certain time has elapsed. If the special symbol (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins. The opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is allowed until the last round of the determined number of rounds (for example, up to 15 rounds).

  When the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (probability variation symbol) with a probability variation, the probability of the next jackpot increases. That is, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the probability variation state.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol display unit 10 enters a state in which the normal symbol is variably displayed. Further, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gaming machine as seen from the back side. As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a variable display control unit including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer 100 for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, and the like are provided. Various boards such as a mounted game control board (main board) 31, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, and a payout control board 37 mounted with a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control are installed. Yes. The game control board 31 is stored in the board storage case 200.

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91 on which power supply circuits for generating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V are mounted. The power supply board 910 is supplied with the game control board 31 and each electrical component control board (the effect control board 80 and the payout control board 37) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and each electrical component (power is supplied) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A power switch as a power supply permission means for executing or shutting off the power supply to the component), and a clear switch for clearing the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 of the game control board 31 are provided. ing. Further, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch (inside the substrate).

  In this embodiment, the main board 31 is provided on the game board side, and the payout control board 37 is provided on the game frame side. Even in such a configuration, as will be described later, the communication between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is performed by serial communication, thereby facilitating the routing of the wiring when replacing the game board. .

  Each control board is equipped with control means including a control microcomputer. The control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, effect display device 9, light emission from a lamp, LED, etc.) provided in the gaming machine according to a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. Body, speaker 27, etc.). Hereinafter, the main board 31 may be included in the control board for explanation. In that case, the control means mounted on the control board refers to each of the game control means and the means for controlling the electrical components provided in the gaming machine in accordance with a command signal from the game control means or the like. A substrate on which a microcomputer other than the main substrate 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub-substrate. The ball payout device 97 is a device for paying out a game ball guided by a passage for guiding the game ball and a sprocket driven by a stepping motor or the like to an upper plate or a lower plate. A payout number counting switch for counting prize balls and rental balls is also configured as part of the unit. In this embodiment, the payout detection means is realized by the payout number count switch 301 and has a function of detecting that a winning ball or a lending ball is actually paid out from the ball payout device 97. In this case, the payout number count switch 301 outputs a detection signal every time one payout of prize balls or rental balls is detected.

  On the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a terminal board 160 having terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed above. On the terminal board 160, for example, a door opening signal terminal for externally outputting a door opening signal indicating that the game frame is in an open state, or a prize ball that is output every time ten prize balls are paid out are detected. A prize ball information terminal for externally outputting information is provided.

  The game ball stored in the storage tank 38 passes through a guide rail (not shown), and reaches a ball payout device 97 covered with a payout case 40A through a curve rod. Above the ball payout device 97, a ball break switch 187 is provided as a game medium break detection means. When the ball break switch 187 detects a ball break, the payout operation of the ball payout device 97 stops. The ball break switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball break detection switch 167 for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion of the guide rail (the storage tank 38). (Proximate part). When the ball break detection switch 167 detects a shortage of game balls, the game balls are replenished to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the replenishment mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning a prize or a game ball based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball guiding path. Further, when the game ball is paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses the full tank switch as the storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as the storage state detection means is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 4 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The game control microcomputer 560 includes a random number circuit 503. The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads numerical data from the random number circuit 503 as a random R when a start winning to the start port switch 14a occurs, and performs a specific display based on the random R at the start of the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol. It is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a result, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 inputs / outputs (transmits / receives) signals to / from the payout control board 37 (the payout control microcomputer 370) and the effect control board 80 (the effect control microcomputer) by serial communication. Serial communication circuit 505 is incorporated. The payout control microcomputer 370 and the effect control microcomputer also incorporate a serial communication circuit for inputting / outputting signals to / from the game control microcomputer 560 through serial communication (the payout control microcomputer 370 includes (Refer to FIG. 5 for the built-in serial communication circuit). The game control microcomputer 560 includes a two-channel serial communication circuit 505, and can perform serial communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 and also performs serial communication with the effect control microcomputer 100. It is possible. However, in this embodiment, for serial communication with the production control microcomputer 100, a signal is output only from the game control microcomputer 560 to the production control microcomputer, and the production control microcomputer 100 No signal is output to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a two-channel serial communication circuit 505 of channel A and channel B. Of these, channel A includes a transmission unit and a reception unit, and has a reception function as well as a data transmission function. On the other hand, channel B includes only a transmission unit and only a data transmission function. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 communicates with the payout control microcomputer 370 using channel A out of the two channels of the serial communication circuit 505, and effects control is performed using channel B. Communication with the microcomputer 100 is performed.

  Note that the communication between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer is not limited to the serial communication configuration, and may be configured to perform parallel communication.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the value of the special symbol process flag and the pending storage number counter) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls (specifically, prize balls described later) The value of the command output counter) is stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer is output when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). Instead of mounting the power monitoring circuit on the power supply board, it may be mounted on a board that is backed up by a backup power supply (for example, the main board 31). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying the basic circuit 53 with detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a and 30a is also mounted on the main board 31, and the variable winning ball device 15 Are mounted on the main board 31 to reset the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on. The solenoid 16 for opening and closing the solenoid and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball apparatus according to a command from the basic circuit 53 are also mounted. There is also a system reset circuit (not shown) for output and an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer. It is mounted on.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the effect display device 9 that receives and displays the effect symbol variably is performed.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 37 and the ball payout device 97. As shown in FIG. 5, a payout control microcomputer 370 including a payout control CPU 371 is mounted on the payout control board 37. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control microcomputer 370, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control means. That is, the payout control means is realized by a payout control CPU 371, a payout control microcomputer 370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 370. Note that, unlike the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM built in the payout control microcomputer 370 has not been backed up by a backup power source. Therefore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the stored contents of the RAM built in the payout control microcomputer 370 are lost.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 performs control to pay out the game ball based on a predetermined payout condition being satisfied. Note that the predetermined payout condition is that a game ball has won a prize area (ordinary prize opening 29, 30, large prize opening, start prize opening 14) provided in the game area, or a rental ball request has been made. To establish. In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot machine or a slot machine, the predetermined payout condition is also satisfied when a game ball or medal return request is made. Further, for example, when applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot machine or a slot machine, the predetermined payout condition is also established when the symbol stop symbol becomes a predetermined winning symbol.

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 187, the full switch 48, and the payout count switch 301 are input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 370 and then output to the main board 31 via the I / O port 372a and the output circuit 373B. .

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 295 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout motor position sensor 295 is a sensor comprising a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. . In the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, the detection signal from the ball break switch 187 indicates a ball shortage state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full state, the payout control microcomputer 370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 90 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher. A full tank signal is output. A launch motor signal output from the AND circuit 91 of the launch board 90 to the launch motor 94 is transmitted from the launch board 90 to the launch motor 94. A full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 91 mounted on the launch board 90, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 92 (for driving the launch motor 94). Is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 91. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 91 is input to the firing motor 94. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 94 is stopped. Even when the payout control microcomputer 370 is outputting a full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 94 is not stopped, and the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher is not stopped. May be.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 560 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 via serial communication circuits 505 and 380. In order to confirm, payout control commands (connection confirmation command, connection OK command) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a connection confirmation command for performing connection confirmation at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 505, and the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the game control microcomputer 560 from the game control microcomputer 560. When the connection confirmation command is received, a connection OK command notifying that is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. Also, for example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 560 sets data indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the number of winning balls set in the setting. The command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball number reception command indicating that the prize ball number has been received to the game control microcomputer 560. Further, when the payout control microcomputer 370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it transmits a prize ball end command indicating the completion of the prize ball to the game control microcomputer 560. The payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball preparing command to the game control microcomputer 560 at regular intervals until the prize ball payout operation is completed. In addition, when a predetermined error (an error such as ball lending, full tank, or out of ball) has occurred, the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command or the winning ball preparation command should be made different from the data indicating the error content. The connection OK command and the winning ball preparation command in which the setting is made are transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. Note that specific signal exchange by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 372c. A detection signal from an error release switch 375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 372f of the payout control board 37. The error cancel switch 375 is used to cancel the error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the payout motor 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 97 via the output port 372a and the relay board 72. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 372a, the description is omitted in FIG.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 50 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 50 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 60, a ball lending LED 61, a ball lending switch 62, and a return switch 63 provided in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 66.

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 62 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 63 has been operated are provided to the card unit 50 from the interface board 66 in accordance with the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 50 to the interface board 66. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 372f and the output port 372d. An interface board 66 is interposed between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 as shown in FIG.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 50. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 50 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 50, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 37. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 37.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 50 and, when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 50, drives the payout motor 289 to give a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 50 to fall. Thereafter, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 50 is not in the ON state, the winning ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control means.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 50 is supplied from the payout control board 37. That is, power supply from the power supply board 910 to the card unit 50 is performed via the payout control board 37 and the interface board 66. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 50 is provided in a 24 V AC power supply line for the card unit 50 arranged in the interface board 66, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 50. It is prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the card unit 50 is installed adjacent to the gaming machine as a separate body from the gaming machine is taken as an example, but the card unit 50 may be integrated with the gaming machine. . Further, the present invention can be applied even in the case where game balls corresponding to the amount of money are lent out in accordance with coin insertion.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 101 including an effect control CPU 101a and a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101a operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown). The effect control microcomputer 100 has a built-in serial communication circuit 101b that inputs / outputs (transmits / receives) signals with the game control microcomputer 560 through serial communication. In addition, the effect control CPU 101a causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101a outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101a. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 a outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. In addition, the production control CPU 101 a outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board 31 and signal lines of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 uses a single signal line for effect control signal transmission to produce an effect control command (effect control signal). Is transmitted to the effect control board 80.

  As shown in FIG. 7, wiring from the start port switch 14a is connected to the main board 31. The main board 31 is also connected to wiring from a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 which is a big winning opening, and various switches 29a and 30a for detecting a winning of a game ball to other winning openings. . Further, the main board 31 is connected to a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and wirings to the solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20.

  The main board 31 includes a game control microcomputer 560, an input driver circuit 58, and an output circuit 59. The game control microcomputer 560 operates in accordance with a clock circuit 501, a reset controller 502 that functions as a system reset means, a random number circuit 503a, 503b, a ROM 54 that stores a game control program, a RAM 55 that is used as a work memory, and a program. CPU 56, CTC 504 for sending an interrupt request signal (interrupt request signal by timer interrupt) to CPU 56, serial communication circuit 505 for performing asynchronous serial communication with microcomputers provided in payout control board 37 and effect control board 80, and I / O An O port unit 57 is incorporated.

  In this embodiment, the microcomputer on a board (for example, the payout control board 37 or the effect control board 80) different from the board (for example, the main board 31) on which the microcomputer incorporating the serial communication circuit 505 is mounted. Although the case where the serial communication circuit 505 is used for communication will be described, the serial communication circuit 505 may perform serial communication with another microcomputer included in the board on which the microcomputer incorporating the serial communication circuit 505 is mounted. For example, when two microcomputers having the same configuration are mounted on the same substrate, serial communication circuits built in the microcomputers may perform serial communication with each other.

The clock circuit 501 outputs a reference clock signal CLK having a predetermined period generated by dividing the system clock signal by 2 ⁷ (= 128) to the random number circuits 503a and 503b. When a low level signal is input for a predetermined period, the reset controller 502 outputs a predetermined initialization signal to the CPU 56 and the random number circuits 503a and 503b to reset the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the game control microcomputer 560 is equipped with two random number circuits 503a and 503b having different ranges of random value values that can be generated. The random number circuit 503a is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 12-bit random number circuit) that generates a 12-bit pseudo-random number. The 12-bit random number circuit 503a has a function of generating a random number having a value within a range that can be generated by 12 bits (that is, a range from 0 to 4095). The random number circuit 503b is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 16-bit random number circuit) that generates a 16-bit pseudo-random number. The 16-bit random number circuit 503b has a function of generating a random number having a value in a range that can be generated in 16 bits (that is, a range from 0 to 65535). In this embodiment, the case where the game control microcomputer 560 includes two random number circuits is described. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may include three or more random number circuits. In this embodiment, when the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are comprehensively expressed, or when indicating either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, This is called a random number circuit 503.

  Next, the configuration of the serial communication circuit 505 will be described. The serial communication circuit 505 is a data format using a full-duplex method, an asynchronous method, and standard NRZ (non-return zero) encoding, and a microcomputer on each control board (for example, the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80). Perform serial communication. The serial communication circuit 505 includes a transmission unit that transmits various data (for example, a prize ball number command and an effect control command) to the microcomputer of each control board, and various data (for example, a prize ball ACK) from the microcomputer of each control board. Command).

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505. The serial communication circuit 505 includes a baud rate register 702, a baud rate generation circuit 703, two status registers 705 and 706, three control registers 707, 708, and 709, a transmission data register 710, a reception data register 711, a transmission shift register 712, and a reception. Shift register 713, interrupt control circuit 714, transmission format / parity generation circuit 715, and reception format / parity check circuit 716. As shown in FIG. 8, the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505 includes a baud rate register 702, a baud rate generation circuit 703, a status register A 705, control registers 707, 708, and 709, and a transmission data register 710. , A transmission shift register 712, an interrupt control circuit 714, and a transmission format / parity generation circuit 715. As shown in FIG. 9, the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505 includes a baud rate register 702, a baud rate generation circuit 703, status registers 705 and 706, control registers 707, 708, and 709, received data, among these components. The register 711, the reception shift register 713, the interrupt control circuit 714, and the reception format / parity check circuit 716 are configured.

  In the serial communication circuit 505, the transmission unit and the reception unit are actually configured using a common circuit. As described above, the serial communication circuit 505 functions as a transmission circuit or a reception circuit by properly using each component of the serial communication circuit 505.

  In this embodiment, the serial communication circuit 505 is configured with two channels. Of these, the channel A includes both the transmitting unit shown in FIG. 8 and the receiving unit shown in FIG. Have. On the other hand, channel B has only the components of the transmission unit shown in FIG. 8, and has only a transmission function.

  First, the data format of data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505 with the microcomputer mounted on each control board will be described. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a data format of data transmitted / received by the serial communication circuit 505 to / from a microcomputer mounted on each control board. As shown in FIG. 10, the data format of data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505 is configured with a start bit, data, and stop bits as one frame. Further, the data length of data transmitted / received by the serial communication circuit 505 can be set to either 8 bits or 9 bits by performing an initial setting in a serial communication circuit setting process described later. FIG. 10A shows an example of a data format when the data length is set to 8 bits. FIG. 10B shows an example of the data format when the data length is set to 9 bits.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the data format of data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505 is a start bit (logic “0”) indicating the start of one frame after an idle line of high level (logic “1”). ")including. The data format includes 8-bit or 9-bit transmission / reception data after the start bit. The data format includes a stop bit (logic “1”) indicating the end of one frame after transmission / reception data.

  The serial communication circuit 505 transmits / receives data first from the least significant bit (bit 0) of transmission / reception data according to the data format shown in FIG. Further, if initial setting is performed in a serial communication circuit setting process described later, it is possible to set so that a parity bit is added to transmission / reception data. When a setting is made to add a parity bit, the most significant bit of the transmission / reception data is used as a parity bit (odd parity or even parity). For example, when the data length is set to 8 bits, bit 7 of transmission / reception data is used as a parity bit. For example, when the data length is set to 9 bits, bit 8 of transmission / reception data is used as a parity bit.

  The baud rate generation circuit 703 generates a baud rate used by the serial communication circuit 505 based on a clock signal output from the clock circuit 501 and a setting value (also referred to as a baud rate setting value) set in the baud rate register 702. In this case, the baud rate generation circuit 703 obtains the baud rate using a predetermined calculation formula based on the clock signal and the baud rate setting value. For example, the baud rate generation circuit 703 obtains the baud rate used by the serial communication circuit 505 using equation (1).

Baud rate = clock frequency / (baud rate set value x 16) Equation (1)

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the baud rate register 702. The baud rate register 702 is a register that sets a predetermined setting value for designating a baud rate value generated by the baud rate generation circuit 703. For example, it is assumed that the baud rate register 702 obtains the baud rate using the equation (1) and the clock frequency is 3 MHz. In this case, if the desired target baud rate is 1200 bps, the setting value “156” is set in the baud rate register 702. Then, the baud rate generation circuit 703 generates the baud rate “1201.92 bps” using the equation (1) based on the clock frequency “3 MHz” and the baud rate set value “156”. The baud rate register 702 is a 16-bit register, and an initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. The baud rate register 702 is configured such that bits 0 to 12 can be written and read. Further, the baud rate register 702 is configured such that bits 13 to 15 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if a control for writing a value to bits 13 to 15 of the baud rate register 702 is performed, it is invalid, and all the values read from the bits 13 to 15 are “0 (= 000b)”.

  FIG. 12A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the control register A707. The control register A 707 is a register for setting the communication format of the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, the communication format of the serial communication circuit 505 is set by setting the value of each bit of the control register A707. In the control register A707, communication format setting data for setting a communication format such as a data format of transmission / reception data and various communication methods is set. As shown in FIG. 12A, the control register A707 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Control register A 707 is configured such that bits 0 to 4 can be written and read. Control register A 707 is configured such that bits 5 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 5 to 7 of the control register A707, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 5 to 7 are “0 (= 000b)”.

  FIG. 12B is an explanatory diagram of an example of communication format setting data set in the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 12B, setting data for setting the data length of data to be transmitted and received is set in bit 4 (bit name “M”) of the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 12B, by setting bit 4 to “0”, the data length of the transmission / reception data is set to 8 bits. Further, by setting bit 4 to “1”, the data length of the transmission / reception data is set to 9 bits.

  In bit 3 (bit name “WAKE”) of the control register A707, setting data for setting a wake-up method for waking up the receiver circuit (the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505) in the standby state. Is set. As shown in FIG. 12B, by setting bit 3 to “0”, an idle line wakeup method is set for wakeup when an idle line is recognized. In addition, by setting bit 3 to “1”, an address mark wakeup method for wakeup by recognizing a predetermined address mark is set.

  In bit 2 (bit name “ILT”) of the control register A707, setting data for selecting an idle line detection method of received data is set. As shown in FIG. 12B, by setting bit 2 to “0”, a detection method for detecting an idle line after the start bit included in the received data is set. In addition, by setting bit 2 to “1”, a detection method for detecting an idle line after a stop bit included in received data is set.

  Setting data for setting whether to use the parity function is set in bit 1 (bit name “PE”) of the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 12B, the parity function is not used by setting bit 1 to “0”. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the parity function is set to be used.

  Setting data for setting the type of parity when the parity function is used is set in bit 0 (bit name “PT”) of the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 12B, by setting bit 0 to “0”, even parity is set as the parity type. Also, by setting bit 0 to “1”, odd parity is set as the parity type.

  FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the control register B708. The control register B 708 is a register for setting whether to permit an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, whether the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is permitted or prohibited is set by setting the value of each bit of the control register B708. In the control register B708, interrupt request setting data indicating whether or not various interrupt requests are permitted is mainly set. In addition to the interrupt request setting data, setting data for performing various settings of the serial communication circuit 505 is also set in the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 13A, the control register B 708 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Control register B 708 is configured such that bits 0 to 7 can be written and read.

  FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of interrupt request setting data set in the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 13B, setting data indicating whether or not a transmission interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed at the time of data transmission, is permitted is set in bit 7 (bit name “TIE”) of the control register B708. Is done. As shown in FIG. 13B, by setting bit 7 to “0”, the transmission interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Also, by setting bit 7 to “1”, the transmission interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 6 (bit name “TCIE”) of the control register B708 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a transmission completion interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be made when data transmission is completed. As shown in FIG. 13B, by setting bit 6 to “0”, the transmission completion interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Also, by setting bit 6 to “1”, the transmission completion interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 5 (bit name “RIE”) of the control register B 708 is set with setting data indicating whether or not a reception interrupt request, which is an interrupt request performed when data is received, is permitted. As shown in FIG. 13B, by setting bit 5 to “0”, the reception interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 5 to “1”, the reception interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 4 (bit name “ILIE”) of the control register B 708 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to allow an idle line interrupt request, which is an interrupt request when an idle line of received data is detected. As shown in FIG. 13B, by setting bit 4 to “0”, an idle line interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 4 to “1”, it is set to permit an idle line interrupt request.

  In bit 3 (bit name “TE”) of the control register B708, setting data indicating whether to use the transmission circuit (the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505) is set. As shown in FIG. 13B, by setting bit 3 to “0”, the transmission circuit is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 3 to “1”, the transmission circuit is set to be used. In this embodiment, setting to use the transmission circuit is performed by setting bit 3 to “1”. Such setting is performed in the initial setting of the main process (for example, step S15a).

  In bit 2 (bit name “RE”) of the control register B708, setting data indicating whether or not to use the receiving circuit is set. As shown in FIG. 13B, by setting bit 2 to “0”, the receiving circuit is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 2 to “1”, the receiving circuit is set to be used. In this embodiment, setting to use the receiving circuit is performed by setting bit 2 to “1”. Such setting is performed in the initial setting of the main process (for example, step S15a).

  Setting data indicating whether or not to use the wakeup function of the receiving circuit is set in bit 1 (bit name “RWU”) of the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 13B, by setting bit 1 to “0”, the wakeup function is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the wakeup function is set to be used.

  Setting data indicating whether or not to use a predetermined break code transmission function is set in bit 0 (bit name “SBK”) of the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 13B, by setting bit 1 to “0”, the break code transmission function is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the break code transmission function is set to be used. When bit 1 is set to “1”, the serial communication circuit 505 causes the microcomputer on which the control board (the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80) is mounted with a break code (for example, a signal continuously including “0”). To send to.

  FIG. 14A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the status register A705. The status register A 705 is a register for confirming various statuses of the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 can confirm various statuses of the serial communication circuit 505 by confirming the value of each bit of the status register A 705. As shown in FIG. 14A, the status register A705 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. In addition, the status register A705 is configured so that bits 0 to 7 can only be read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bit 0 to bit 7 of the status register A705, it is invalidated.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 710 (transmission data empty) or transmission of transmission data stored in the transmission shift register 712 is completed, interrupt control is performed. Circuit 714 sets the corresponding bit in status register A705. Then, the CPU 56 reads the value of each bit set in the status register A705.

  FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of status confirmation data stored in the status register A705. As shown in FIG. 14B, a transmission completion flag indicating that transmission of transmission data from the serial communication circuit 505 is completed is stored in bit 7 (bit name “TC”) of the status register A 705. As shown in FIG. 14B, when “0” is stored in the bit 7, the transmission data stored in the transmission shift register 712 is being transmitted, and the transmission data from the serial communication circuit 505 is transmitted. Indicates that transmission has not been completed. When “1” is stored in bit 7, the transmission data stored in the transmission shift register 712 has been transferred, and transmission of the transmission data from the serial communication circuit 505 has been completed. It shows that. When the command storage area is in the ring buffer format, when “1” is stored in bit 7, the command read pointer is updated.

  Note that the transmission of the transmission data is completed, and the game control microcomputer 560 waits for a reception confirmation signal from the transmission destination microcomputer. In this embodiment, when a transmission interrupt is set as will be described later, the serial communication circuit 505 sets the bit 7 of the status register A 705 to “1” and confirms reception when detecting the completion of transmission of transmission data. An interrupt request (referred to as an interrupt request during transmission) is made to the CPU 56 as a signal waiting state.

  Bit 6 (bit name “TDBE”) of status register A 705 stores a transmission data empty flag indicating that transmission data is not stored in transmission data register 710 (transmission data empty). As shown in FIG. 14B, when “0” is stored in bit 6, the transmission data is not yet transferred from the transmission data register 710 to the transmission shift register 712, and transmitted to the transmission data register 710. Indicates that the data is still stored. In addition, when “0” is stored in bit 6, data is not written to the transmission data register. For example, in steps S5211, S52305, transmission data is set on condition that “0” is not stored in bit 6. When “1” is stored in bit 6, the transmission data is transferred from the transmission data register 710 to the transmission shift register 712, and there is no transmission data in the transmission data register 710 (transmission data empty). ).

  Bit 5 (bit name “RDRF”) of status register A 705 stores a reception data full flag indicating that reception data is stored in reception data register 711 (reception data full). As shown in FIG. 14B, when “0” is stored in bit 5, it indicates that the reception data register 711 contains no reception data. When “1” is stored in bit 5, the value of the reception shift register 713 is transferred to the reception data register 711, and reception data is stored in the reception data register 711 (reception data Full). Bit 5 of the status register A 705 is set to “1” when a break code is detected, a framing error is detected, or a parity error is detected.

  Whether or not the command from the payout control microcomputer 370 has been received is confirmed by whether or not “1” is stored in bit 5. For example, in steps S5221, S52401, and S52501, it is determined that the command is received on condition that “0” is not stored in bit 5. In this embodiment, bit 5 (RDRF) of status register A 705 is cleared when reception data is read from reception data register 711 by game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the data stored in the reception data register 711 is also cleared based on the reading by the game control microcomputer 560. However, when an error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, the content of the reception data register 711 may be cleared by reading the reception data, or the reception circuit (reception unit) of the serial circuit 505 may be initialized. Thus, the contents of the reception data register 711 may be cleared.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when an error occurs in the serial communication circuit, the serial communication circuit 505 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 reads the received data by reading the received data. The contents of 711 are cleared and the received data is discarded. As for the serial communication circuit 380 installed in the payout control microcomputer 370, the contents of the reception data register are cleared and the reception data is discarded by initializing the reception circuit (reception unit).

  If the bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A 705 is not automatically cleared when the received data is read, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the received data from the received data register 711. Every time reception data is read, it is necessary to perform processing for clearing bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A705. In addition, when the reception data register 711 is not configured to be automatically cleared, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the reception data register 711 from the reception data register 711 every time the reception data register 711 is read. It is necessary to clear. Also in this case, for example, the reception data register 711 and the bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A 705 may be cleared by initializing the reception circuit (reception unit) of the serial communication circuit 505.

  For example, the serial communication circuit 505 clears the contents of the reception data register 711 and bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A 705 by hardware based on reading the reception data from the reception data register 711. May be. In this case, for example, based on the fact that the interrupt control circuit 714 of the serial communication circuit 505 detects that the reception data is read from the reception data register 711, the contents of the reception data register 711 and bit 5 of the status register A 705 are detected. (RDRF) may be cleared.

  When the reception data is stored in the reception data register 711, the CPU 56 is ready to perform reception processing by reading the reception data from the reception data register 711. In this embodiment, when the reception interrupt is set, the serial communication circuit 505 sets the bit 5 of the status register A 705 to “1” when reception data full is detected, and enables reception processing. As an example, an interrupt request is made to the CPU 56 (referred to as an interrupt request upon reception).

  Bit 4 (bit name “NF”) of the status register A705 stores a noise error flag indicating that noise has been detected in the received data. As shown in FIG. 14B, when “0” is stored in bit 4, it indicates that the receiving circuit is not detecting noise in the received data. When “1” is stored in bit 4, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected noise in the received data.

  For example, when detecting each bit of the received data, the serial communication circuit 505 detects “1” or “0” having a predetermined bit length using the baud rate generated by the baud rate generation circuit 703. In this case, when the detected length of “1” or “0” is less than the predetermined bit length, the serial communication circuit 505 detects a noise error as noise generated in the received data. When a noise error occurs, there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received due to the noise, which causes the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when detecting a noise error, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 4 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 as an error has occurred during communication.

  Bit 4 of the status register A705 is set to “1” even when a break code is detected, a framing error is detected, or a parity error is detected. The value of bit 4 of the status register A 705 is cleared when the reception data is read from the reception data register 711 after being read by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Bit 3 (bit name “ORE”) of the status register A 705 indicates that the reception shift register 713 has received the next data before the CPU 56 reads the reception data stored in the reception data register 711 (overload). An overrun flag indicating (run) is stored. As shown in FIG. 14B, when “0” is stored in bit 3, it indicates that the receiving circuit has not detected an overrun. If “1” is stored in bit 3, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected an overrun.

  If an overrun occurs, the next received data is stored in the receiving shift register 713 before the received data in the received data register 711 is read, so that the received data is overwritten and the CPU 56 receives the received data. It cannot be read correctly. For this reason, communication with the microcomputer mounted on each control board cannot be performed correctly, causing the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when detecting an overrun, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 3 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 as an error has occurred during communication.

  The value of bit 3 of the status register A705 is cleared when the reception data is read from the reception data register 711 after being read by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Bit 2 (bit name “BRK”) of status register A 705 stores a break code detection flag indicating that the receiving circuit has detected a break code. As shown in FIG. 14B, when “0” is stored in bit 2, it indicates that the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505 has not detected a break code. When “1” is stored in bit 2, it indicates that the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505 has detected a break code.

  In this embodiment, when “0” in one or more frames is detected after detecting a framing error, it is recognized as a break code, and “1” is set in bit 5 (RDRF) of status register A 705. 2 (BRK) is set to “1”.

  The value of bit 2 of the status register A 705 is cleared when the reception data is read from the reception data register 711 after being read by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Bit 1 (bit name “FE”) of the status register A 705 indicates that it is detected that the position of the stop bit of the received data is “0” (originally, the stop bit is “1”) (framing error). A framing error flag is stored. As shown in FIG. 14B, when “0” is stored in bit 1, it indicates that the receiving circuit has not detected a framing error in the received data. When “1” is stored in bit 1, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected a framing error. In this embodiment, when a framing error is detected, “1” is set to bit 1 (FE) of status register A 705 and “1” is also set to bit 5 (RDRF). . However, even if an overrun error occurs, bit 1 (FE) of status register A705 does not change.

  When a framing error occurs, it is in a state where the stop bit of the received data has not been correctly received, and therefore there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received, causing the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when detecting a framing error, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 1 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 as an error has occurred during communication.

  The value of bit 1 of the status register A705 is cleared when the reception data is read from the reception data register 711 after being read by the game control microcomputer 560. When a framing error occurs, the next data cannot be received until bit 1 of status register A705 is cleared.

  Bit 0 (bit name “PE”) of status register A 705 has a parity error flag indicating that the parity value obtained from the received data does not match the parity value included in the received data (parity error). Is stored. As shown in FIG. 14B, when “0” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the receiving circuit has not detected a parity error in the received data. Further, when “1” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected a parity error. In this embodiment, when a parity error is detected, “1” is set to bit 0 (PE) of status register A 705 and “1” is also set to bit 5 (RDRF). . However, even if an overrun error occurs, bit 0 (PE) of status register A705 does not change.

  When a parity error occurs, it is in a state where each data bit or parity bit of the received data has not been correctly received, so there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received, causing the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when the serial communication circuit 505 detects a parity error, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 0 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 on the assumption that an error has occurred during communication.

  It should be noted that the value of bit 0 of the status register A 705 is cleared when the reception data is read from the reception data register 711 after being read by the game control microcomputer 560. If a parity error occurs, the next data cannot be received until bit 0 of the status register A705 is cleared.

  FIG. 15A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the status register B706. The status register B 706 is a register for confirming the reception state (reception status) of the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 can confirm the reception status of the serial communication circuit 505 by confirming the value of the bit of the status register B 706. As shown in FIG. 15B, the status register B 706 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Further, the status register B 706 is configured so that bit 0 can only be read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bit 0 of status register A 705, it is invalid. Status register B 706 is configured such that bits 1 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 1 to 7 of the status register A 705, the value is invalid and all the values read from bits 1 to 7 are “0 (= 0000b)”.

  FIG. 15B is a diagram showing an example of status confirmation data stored in the status register B706. As shown in FIG. 15B, a reception active flag indicating that the reception circuit is receiving reception data (reception active) is stored in bit 0 (bit name “RAF”) of the status register B706. . As shown in FIG. 15B, when “0” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the reception circuit is not receiving reception data. Further, when “1” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the reception circuit is receiving reception data. Even when “1” is stored in bit 0, command data is not written or command data cannot be written. When the serial communication circuit 505 detects the start bit, it assumes that reception of received data has started, and sets bit 0 of the status register B 706 to “1”.

  FIG. 16A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the control register C709. The control register C709 is a register for setting whether to permit an interrupt request when a communication error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, by setting the value of each bit of the control register C709, it is set whether to permit or prohibit an interrupt request during communication from the serial communication circuit 505. In the control register C709, error interrupt request setting data indicating whether or not various interrupt requests at the time of a communication error are permitted is mainly set. In addition to the error interrupt request setting data, the control register C709 stores 9th bit data when the data length is set to 9 bits. Various settings of the serial communication circuit 505 are also set. As shown in FIG. 16A, the control register C709 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Control register C709 is configured such that bits 0 to 3 and bits 6 and 7 can be written and read. Further, the control register C709 is configured such that bits 4 and 5 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if a control for writing a value to bits 4 and 5 of the control register C709 is performed, it is invalid, and all the values read from the bits 4 and 5 are “0 (= 0000b)”.

  FIG. 16B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of error interrupt request setting data set in the control register C709. As shown in FIG. 16B, the bit 7 (bit name “R8”) of the control register C709 stores the 9th bit data of the received data when the data length is set to 9 bits. Further, bit 6 (bit name “T8”) of the control register C709 stores the 9th bit data of the transmission data when the data length is set to 9 bits.

  In bit 3 (bit name “ORIE”) of the control register C709, setting data indicating whether or not to permit an overrun flag interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed when an overrun is detected, is set. As shown in FIG. 16B, by setting bit 3 to “0”, the overrun flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 3 to “1”, the overrun flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 2 (bit name “NEIE”) of the control register C709 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a noise error flag interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed when a noise error is detected. As shown in FIG. 16B, by setting bit 2 to “0”, the noise error flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Also, by setting bit 2 to “1”, the noise error flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 1 (bit name “FEIE”) of the control register C709 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a framing error flag interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed when a framing error is detected. As shown in FIG. 16B, by setting bit 1 to “0”, the framing error flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the framing error flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 0 (bit name “PEIE”) of the control register C709 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a parity error flag interrupt request which is an interrupt request to be performed when a parity error is detected. As shown in FIG. 16B, by setting bit 0 to “0”, the parity error flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 0 to “1”, the parity error flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a data register included in the serial communication circuit 505. The data register 701 is a register that stores data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505. As shown in FIG. 17, the data register is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Data register 701 is configured such that bits 0 to 7 can be written and read.

  In this embodiment, when the serial communication circuit 505 transmits transmission data, the data register is used as the transmission data register 710. When the data length is set to 9 bits, bit 6 of the data register and control register C709 is used as the transmission data register 710. In this case, bits 0 to 7 of the data register are used as bits 0 to 7 of the transmission data register 710, and bit 6 of the control register C709 is used as bit 8 of the transmission data register 710.

  When the serial communication circuit 505 receives received data, the data register is used as the received data register 711. When the data length is set to 9 bits, bit 7 of the data register and control register C709 is used as the reception data register 711. In this case, bit 0 to bit 7 of the data register are used as bit 0 to bit 7 of the reception data register 711, and bit 7 of the control register C 709 is used as bit 8 of the reception data register 711.

  The interrupt control circuit 714 makes various interrupt requests to the CPU 56. In this embodiment, when the bit 6 (TCIE) of the control register B 708 is set to “1”, the interrupt control circuit 714 notifies the CPU 56 when transmission of transmission data to the transmission data register 710 is completed. In addition to outputting an interrupt signal, an interrupt request is made by setting bit 7 (TC) of status register A705 to “1”. The interrupt control circuit 714 may output a different interrupt signal to the CPU 56 for each interrupt factor, instead of making the interrupt factor identifiable by the set value of the bit of the status register A705.

  In addition, when bit 5 (RIE) of the control register B 708 is set to “1”, the interrupt control circuit 714 enters a state where reception data is stored in the reception data register 711 (when reception data full is detected). ), An interrupt signal is output to the CPU 56, and an interrupt request is made by setting bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A705 to “1”.

  Further, when any of the bits 0 to 3 of the control register C709 is set to “1”, the interrupt control circuit 714 outputs an interrupt signal to the CPU 56 and also indicates the type of communication error. In response to this, an interrupt request is made by setting "1" to bits 0, 1, 3, and 4 of the status register A705. For example, when bit 3 (ORIE) of control register C709 is set to “1”, when an overrun is detected and an interrupt request is made, bit 3 (ORE) of status register A705 is set to “1”. To do. For example, when bit 2 (NEIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, when a noise error is detected and an interrupt request is made, “1” is set to bit 4 (NF) of the status register A705. Set. For example, when bit 1 (FEIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, when a framing error is detected and an interrupt request is made, “1” is set to bit 1 (FE) of the status register A705. Set. For example, when bit 0 (PEIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, when a parity error is detected and an interrupt request is made, “1” is set to bit 0 (PE) of the status register A705. Set. When a plurality of communication errors are detected, the interrupt control circuit 714 makes an interrupt request based on the plurality of communication errors and sets the corresponding bits of the status register A 705 to “1”.

  The transmission format / parity generation circuit 715 generates a data format of transmission data. In this embodiment, the transmission format / parity generation circuit 715 generates a data format by adding a start bit and a stop bit to the transmission data stored in the transmission data register 710 and transfers the data format to the transmission shift register 712. When bit 1 (PE) of the control register A707 is set to “1” and the parity function is set to be used, the transmission format / parity generation circuit 715 adds a parity bit to the transmission data. Generate a data format.

  The reception format / parity check circuit 716 detects the data format of the reception data. In this embodiment, the reception format / parity check circuit 716 detects the start bit and the stop bit from the reception data stored in the reception shift register 713, detects the data portion included in the reception data, and receives the reception data register. Forward to 711. When bit 1 (PE) of the control register A707 is set to “1” and the parity function is set to be used, the reception format / parity check circuit 716 obtains the parity of the reception data and receives the reception data. It is detected whether or not it matches the parity included in. If the obtained value does not match the parity included in the received data, the reception format / parity check circuit 716 detects a parity error. If it is set in the serial communication circuit setting process to be described later that an interrupt request at the time of communication error is permitted, the interrupt control circuit 714 interrupts the CPU 56 with the occurrence of the communication error as a cause of interruption when detecting a parity error. Make a request.

  In this embodiment, the serial communication circuit 505 transfers the data one by one from the transmission data register 710 to the transmission shift register 712 or transmits the data from the reception shift register 713 to the reception data register 711. For example, the transmission data register 710 and the reception data register 711 are configured in a FIFO format (for example, a 32-byte queue), and the transmission data and reception data are temporarily stored in the queue, You may make it read. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform data transmission processing and reading processing that are continued to some extent. In such a configuration, a mode in which the transmission data register 710 and the reception data register 711 are used as a FIFO (FIFO mode) and a mode in which the single register is used (normal mode) can be switched. A mode setting bit may be provided in A, and the FIFO mode and the normal mode may be switched by changing the value of the bit.

  The jackpot determination table memory 571 stores a plurality of jackpot determination tables used by the CPU 56 to determine whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18A, the big hit determination table memory 571 stores a normal time big hit determination table 571a used in a gaming state (referred to as a normal state) other than the probability variation state. Further, the jackpot determination table memory 571 stores a probability change jackpot determination table 571b used in the probability change state, as shown in FIG. When the big hit determination is performed using the determination table shown in FIG. 18, the probability of determining a big hit depends greatly on the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this case, for example, if the set random number maximum value is too small, the difference in the probability of determining a big hit between the case where the normal big hit determination table 571a is used and the case where the probability variation big hit determination table 571b is used is small. As a result, the player's interest in the game is diminished. Therefore, a plurality of determination tables (a plurality of normal time big hit determination tables 571a and a plurality of probability variation big hit determination tables 571b) are stored in the big hit determination table memory 571 in association with the random number circuit 503 and the random number maximum value. Also good. Then, the CPU 56 uses the random number circuit 503 to be used and the determination tables 571a and 571b corresponding to the maximum random number among the determination tables stored in the big hit determination table memory 571, and displays the special symbol according to the display result determination program 552. You may make it determine whether the display result of the apparatus 8 is made a big hit symbol. By doing so, even if the type of random number circuit 503 to be used and the maximum random number value are different, it is possible to control so that the probability of determining a big hit is somewhat the same.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, for example, in the case of the normal big hit determination table shown in FIG. In the case of the probability change big hit determination table shown in FIG. In each jackpot determination table, a determination value may be assigned to a series of one range.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 19, a payout control signal (a connection signal in this example) transmitted to the payout control board 37 is output from the output port 0. Further, a solenoid (large winning port door solenoid) 21 for opening and closing a variable winning ball device 20 for opening and closing the big winning port, and a solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid) 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 are driven. The signal is also output from output port 0.

  Note that the logic (for example, 0 is on) opposite to the “logic” (for example, 1 is on) shown in FIG. 19 may be used. In particular, for the connection signal, the main board 31 and the payout control board. The “logic” is determined so that the payout control microcomputer 370 always detects the off state when the signal line to the terminal 37 is disconnected or when the cable is disconnected (including no cable connection). . Specifically, generally, when disconnection or cable disconnection occurs, a high level is detected on the signal receiving side, so the high level on the signal line between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is the game control means. The “logic” is determined to be in the off state at the output port at. Therefore, if necessary, an output buffer circuit for logically inverting the signal is provided outside the output port on the main board 31.

  Then, from the output port 1 to the external device (for example, hall computer) via the terminal board 160, a seed information output signal, that is, information related to the control (for example, start port signal, symbol determination number 1 signal, jackpot 1 signal, 2 jackpots, 3 jackpots, short time signal, security signal) are output. In this embodiment, a door opening signal indicating that the game frame is in an open state, and prize ball information output every time ten prize balls are paid out are also detected via the terminal board 160. Is output. In this case, on the payout control board 37 side, it is detected that the game frame is in the open state and the payout of the winning ball is detected, and a door opening signal and winning ball information are input to the main board 31. The door opening signal and prize ball information input to the main board 31 are output to the outside via the terminal board 160 via the main board 31 as they are without passing through the game control microcomputer 560. However, the door opening signal and the prize ball information are branched on the main board 31 and are also input to the game control microcomputer 560. The door opening signal and prize ball information input to the main board 31 may be output to the outside via the terminal board 160 after temporarily passing through the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 20, the bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0 have a count switch 23, a gate switch 32a, winning port switches 29a and 30a, a magnet sensor signal 1, a magnet sensor signal 2, a door opening signal, and a prize, respectively. Sphere information is input. In this embodiment, two magnet sensors (not shown) for detecting fraud using a magnet are provided, and detection signals from the respective magnet sensors are also input from the input port 0. . Further, the detection signal of the start port switch 14a is input to bit 0 of the input port 1. In addition, the power-off signal and the clear switch detection signal from the power supply board 910 are input to the bits 3 and 4 of the input port 1, respectively.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the CPU 56 starts outputting a connection signal to the payout control microcomputer 370 (step S4). When the CPU 56 starts outputting the connection signal in step S4, the CPU 56 sends a connection signal to the payout control microcomputer 370 unless the power supply of the gaming machine is stopped or output is impossible due to some communication error. Output continuously.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S5). By the processing in step S5, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (step S6), and proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  Note that a software delay process for delaying the start timing of the game device control process (game control process) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and proceeds to step S15. In addition, after setting in step S93, a backup command is transmitted after serial communication circuit setting processing in step S15a described later is performed.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball-out flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in a flag for performing the above.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used. After setting in step S13, an initialization command is transmitted after serial communication circuit setting processing in step S15a described later is performed.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuits 503a and 503b (step S15). In this case, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program 551 to make the random number circuits 503a and 503b update the random R value.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15a). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 54 in the serial communication circuit 505 in accordance with the serial communication circuit setting program, so that the serial communication circuit 505 performs serial communication with the payout control microcomputer. I do.

  When the serial communication circuit 505 is initialized, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15b). In this case, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of interrupt processing by executing processing according to the interrupt priority setting program 557.

  For example, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of each interrupt process according to a predetermined interrupt process priority table including the default priority of each interrupt process. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 performs initialization according to the interrupt processing priority table so as to preferentially execute an interrupt process whose cause is the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets an interrupt priority execution flag at the time of communication error indicating that priority is given to an interrupt process whose cause is an interrupt.

  In this embodiment, when a timer interrupt and an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 are generated at the same time, the CPU 56 preferentially performs an interrupt process by the timer interrupt.

  In addition, the default priority of each interrupt process can be changed by the user. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying an interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Then, the CPU 56 sets the priority of interrupt processing according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  In addition to steps S15 to S15b, a part of the setting process of the random number circuit 503 and the serial communication circuit 505 is also executed in the process of step S5. For example, in step S5, an initial value is set in the baud rate register, communication setting register, interrupt control register, and status register of the serial communication circuit 505 as the built-in device register.

  For example, in setting the internal device register, the CPU 56 sets the baud rate of the serial communication circuit 505. In this case, the CPU 56 writes a setting value corresponding to the baud rate to be set in the baud rate register 702 of the serial communication circuit 505. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying a set value set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Then, the CPU 56 writes the setting value in the baud rate register 702 according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. For example, when the baud rate set value “156” is set by the CPU 56, the baud rate “1201.92 bps” is generated by the baud rate generation circuit 703 using the equation (1) and the clock frequency “3 MHz”.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the data format of data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505. In this case, the CPU 56 sets the data length (8 bits or 9 bits) of the transmission / reception data and the presence / absence of the parity function by setting the value of each bit of the control register A707. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying the value of each bit of the control register A707 set by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the game machine) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Yes. Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of each bit of the control register A707 according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  Further, for example, the CPU 56 sets whether to permit each interrupt request generated by the serial communication circuit 505. In this case, the CPU 56 sets the value of bits 5, 6, and 7 of the control register B708 to thereby send an interrupt request at the time of transmission (a transmission interrupt request that is an interrupt request when transmitting data, or a transmission completion interrupt that is performed when transmission is completed). Request) and whether or not to accept interrupt request at reception. The CPU 56 can also be set to allow both a transmission interrupt request and a reception interrupt request, and allows only one of a transmission interrupt request and a reception interrupt request. It is also possible to set. Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to permit an interrupt request at the time of each communication error by setting the values of the bits 0 to 3 of the control register C709. For example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 stores, in advance, a predetermined storage area in the ROM 54 for specifying information for specifying the value of each bit of the control register B 708 and the control register C 709 set by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the gaming machine). I remember it. Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of each bit of the control register B 708 and the control register C 709 according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  In the initialization process of the main process, a process of setting “250” as an initial value to a prize ball number counter used for detecting a prize ball shortage error or a prize ball excess error, which will be described later, is also executed. Note that the process of setting the initial value to the prize ball number counter may be executed, for example, in the process of sequentially setting each initial value in the work area of steps S92 and S12, until the process proceeds to steps S15 to S17. It only has to be executed during

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 first disables the interrupt (step S17), executes the initial value random number update process (step S18a) and the display random number update process (step S18b), The interrupt is permitted again (step S19). That is, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt disabled state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and interrupts enable state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are finished. To.

  The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol for generating a jackpot or whether to shift the gaming state to a probable state) Initial value of the count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a probability variation determining random number for generating, a normal random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as an effect display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the gaming machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display 8. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a random number for determining a reach for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated, is used. Used. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  In addition, when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed by the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process also in the timer interrupt process described later (that is, the timer This is because the same process is executed in steps S26 and S27 of the interrupt process), so as to avoid conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  When the interrupt-permitted state is set in step S19, the timer interrupt or interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is permitted until the next processing in step S17 is executed and the interrupt-prohibited state is set. . When a timer interrupt occurs while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a timer interrupt process to be described later. When an interrupt request is generated from the serial communication circuit 505 while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 causes each interrupt process (communication error interrupt process or reception Execute time interruption processing and transmission completion interruption processing). In this embodiment, priority is given to the interrupt process before the timer interrupt or the interrupt request is set to be permitted by executing step S15b before the loop process from step S17 to step S19. Processing for setting or changing the order is performed.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A timer interrupt process that is activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt is executed. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Then, the CPU 56 inputs detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switches 29a and 30a through the switch circuit 58, and detects the input of each switch (switches) Process: Step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for notifying an abnormal winning when it detects that a game ball has won a prize at a time other than the regular time (step S23: abnormal winning notification process). Moreover, CPU56 performs the magnet sensor error alerting | reporting process which alert | reports a magnet sensor error based on having input the detection signal from the magnet sensor (step S24).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control (determination random number update process: step S25). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command by setting an effect control command related to the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol in the transmission data register of the serial communication circuit 505 (effect symbol command control process: step S30). . It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as a start port signal supplied to the hall management computer, a symbol determination number of times 1 signal, a jackpot 1 to 3 signal, a time reduction signal, a security signal, and the like (step S31). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for transmitting / receiving (input / output) signals to / from the payout control microcomputer 370 via the serial communication circuit 505, and when a winning occurs, detection of the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, etc. Prize ball processing is performed for setting the number of prize balls based on the signal (step S32). In this embodiment, data indicating the number of winning balls is obtained by changing the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command in response to detection of winning based on the winning opening switches 29a, 30a being turned on. The set prize ball number command is output to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the serial communication circuit 505. The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set.

  In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to the connection signal and the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0. Is output to the output port (step S34: output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S35).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S36). Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is the short time state, the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp indicating the short time state is set in the output buffer. When the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), state display control data for displaying a state indicator lamp indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. You may do it.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a frame state output process for transmitting a frame state display command in which information indicating the error state of the gaming machine is set to the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to display the error state of the gaming machine. Execute (Step S39).

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S40), and the process ends.

  Next, the prize ball process (step S32) in the main process will be described. First, payout control signals (connection signals, prize ball information) and payout control commands transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control means to the payout control means. In this embodiment, a connection signal and prize ball information are transmitted and received as control signals between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 in order to perform various controls relating to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 23, the connection signal is output when the main board 31 rises (when the game control means starts the game control process), and notifies the payout control board 37 that the main board 31 has risen. This is a signal (connection signal for the main board 31). The connection signal indicates that the prize ball can be paid out. The connection signal is output via the I / O port 57 and the output circuit 67A of the game control microcomputer 560, and is used for payout control via the input circuit 373A and the I / O port 372e of the payout control microcomputer 370. It is input to the microcomputer 370. The connection signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted through one signal line. Note that the connection signal is ready to be output by setting an initial value to the bit corresponding to the connection signal of the output port 0 by the process of step S4 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, in step S34). Although it is output by processing, it may be output at the timing of step S4). The prize ball information is information for notifying the main board 31 that ten prize balls have been detected each time one prize ball has been detected on the payout control board 37 side. . The prize ball information is output via the I / O port 372a and the output circuit 373B of the payout control microcomputer 370, and the game control is performed via the input circuit 67B and the I / O port 57 of the game control microcomputer 560. To the microcomputer 560. The prize ball information is 1-bit data and is transmitted through one signal line.

  Similarly to the game control microcomputer 560, the payout control microcomputer 370 includes a serial communication circuit 380. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560 and the serial communication circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control means and the payout control means. In this embodiment, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the payout control command is composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and is output as a control command indicating a predetermined content depending on the content of the set 8-bit data.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 560 at regular intervals (1 s) in order to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is normal. Control command to be sent. The data content of the connection confirmation command is “A0 (H)”, that is, “10100000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 370 issues a connection confirmation command. Is a control command that is transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “1000xxxx”. Here, with regard to “xxxx” in the second byte of the connection OK command, as shown in FIG. 25, a winning ball error (a winning ball paying operation based on winning or a ball lending paying operation based on a ball lending request cannot be normally performed. An abnormal state that is in a state: Specifically, when the main control unconnected error shown in FIG. 70, the payout switch abnormality detection error 1, the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, or the main control communication error) occurs. In this case, “1” is set to “x” of the first bit (bit 0). When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit (bit 1). When a ball break error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit (bit 2). In addition, when a payout number abnormality error occurs when the cumulative value of the number of payouts of prize balls and rental balls, which will be described later, reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2000), the fourth bit (bit 3) “1” is set to “x” of In this way, during the confirmation of the connection between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected. 560 can be notified. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the connection OK command is set to a value indicating a payout error (prize ball error, full tank error, ball out error, payout number error) as a control state. A control state other than an error may be set in the connection OK command. For example, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets a value indicating that a prize ball payout operation or a lending ball payout operation is in a control state to the connection OK command, and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 560. You may make it do.

  The award ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 15) of game balls for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 based on the occurrence of a win. . The content of the prize ball number command data is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxx”. In this embodiment, three game balls are paid out when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 14a, and 10 game balls are paid out when a game ball is detected by any of the game port switches 29a and 30a. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 14a, a prize ball number command “01010011” for notifying the number of prize balls of 3 is transmitted, and the game ball is detected by one of the winning port switches 29a and 30a. If a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying 10 prize balls is transmitted and a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls for notifying 15 prize balls is sent. The command “0101111” is transmitted.

  The prize ball number acceptance command is a control command for notifying that the prize ball number specified by the prize ball quantity command has been accepted, and the payout control microcomputer 370 responds upon receipt of the prize ball quantity command. It is a control command transmitted as a signal. The content of the prize ball number reception command data is “70 (H)”, that is, “01110000”.

  The award ball end command is a control command indicating that the award ball operation (award ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command that the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits based on the end of the award ball operation. The data content of the winning ball end command is “50 (H)”, that is, “01010000”.

  The command for preparing a prize ball is a control command for notifying that a prize ball movement has not been completed due to a long time for a prize ball movement, a rental ball movement or a predetermined error. is there. The contents of the data of the winning ball preparation command are “4x (H)”, that is, “0100xxxx”. Here, with regard to “xxxx” of the second byte of the command for preparing a prize ball, as shown in FIG. 25, when a prize ball error occurs, “1” is set to “1” in the first bit (bit 0). Is set. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit (bit 1). When a ball break error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit (bit 2). In addition, when a payout number abnormality error occurs when the cumulative value of the number of payouts of prize balls and rental balls, which will be described later, reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2000), the fourth bit (bit 3) “1” is set to “x” of In this way, the payout control microcomputer 370 receives a prize ball when the prize ball operation takes a long time, or during a lending ball operation or when a predetermined error occurs during the execution of the prize ball operation. The game control microcomputer 560 can be notified that the operation has not ended, and the contents of the error can also be notified to the game control microcomputer 560. As in the case of the connection OK command, the award ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits in accordance with the error state (by changing the predetermined bits). Note that the command for preparing a prize ball is not only in a state where an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also in a state where the prize ball payout operation cannot be started immediately because the ball rental operation is in progress, This command (signal) is output even in the running state (the state in which the payout operation for the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command has not been completed). In the example shown in FIG. 25, a case in which a value indicating a payout error (a prize ball error, a full tank error, a ball shortage error, a payout number error error) is set as the control state in the award ball preparation command is shown. However, a control state other than an error may be set in the connection OK command. For example, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets a value indicating that the prize ball payout operation or the lending ball payout operation is in the control state in the award ball preparation command, and the game control microcomputer 560. You may make it transmit to.

  In this embodiment, the connection confirmation signal is realized by a connection confirmation command of the payout control command, the response signal is realized by a connection OK command, the payout number signal is realized by a prize ball number command, and the acceptance signal is It is realized by a prize ball number acceptance command, a payout end signal is realized by a prize ball end command, and a payout signal is realized by a prize ball preparation command.

  26 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of the control signal shown in FIG. 23 and the control command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the connection signal is output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67A and is input to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. The prize ball information is output by the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output circuit 373B, and input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 67B. A prize ball signal 1 and a gaming machine error state signal, which will be described later, are also output by the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output circuit 373B and input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 67B. May be. The door opening signal may also be output by the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output circuit 373B and input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 67B.

  Of the control commands, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are output from the serial circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560 and input to the serial circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370. Of the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball number reception command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370, and the game control microcomputer 560 It is input to the built-in serial circuit 505. In FIG. 26, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 side and a payout control microcomputer) are used as signal lines for serial communication. 370 shows a signal line for transmitting a command from 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 side, but actually, the payout control command is transmitted and received through one signal line. A signal line for transmitting a command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 side, and a signal line for transmitting a command from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 side. May be configured as separate signal lines.

  Next, transmission / reception of a payout control command between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370, and the payout control microcomputer 370 is connected to the game control microcomputer 560. An OK command, a prize ball number reception command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparation command are transmitted.

  FIG. 27 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 27, the game control microcomputer 560 is connected via the serial communication circuit 505 to confirm whether the signal line connection with the payout control microcomputer 370 is disconnected. A confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. When the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the connection confirmation command via the serial communication circuit 380, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560. When the game control microcomputer 560 receives the connection OK command, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a connection confirmation command after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are sequence diagrams showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during the prize ball movement. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, when a winning occurs and a winning ball payout operation is executed, the game control microcomputer 560 is set with data indicating the number of winning balls via the serial communication circuit 505. The prize ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 does not set a value indicating an error in the lower 4 bits of the received connection OK command with respect to the previously transmitted connection confirmation command (see FIG. 25), and A winning ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 on the condition that the winning prize is received after the connection OK signal is received until 1 second elapses.

  Next, when the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the award ball number command, if the award ball operation can be executed immediately (that is, if the lending ball is not being dispensed and no error has occurred), the award A prize ball number reception command indicating that the number of balls has been received is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560 via the serial communication circuit 380. If the prize ball payout is not completed within 1 s (1 second) from the time when the prize ball number acceptance command is transmitted, the prize ball is being prepared after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the prize ball number acceptance command is transmitted. Send a command. Thereafter, until the completion of the payout of the winning ball, the winning ball preparation command is repeatedly transmitted every 1 s (1 second) after the winning ball preparation command is transmitted. Also, a payout operation for the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command is executed, and when the prize ball payout operation is completed, a prize ball end command indicating the end of the prize ball payout operation is played via the serial communication circuit 380. It transmits to the control microcomputer 560.

  Next, when the game control microcomputer 560 receives the prize ball end command, as shown in FIG. 28, if the number of prize balls to be paid out is not yet stored, the game ball control command 560 issues a prize ball end command. Transmission of a new connection confirmation command is resumed after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29, when the number of winning balls to be paid out is already stored, a winning ball number command for designating the next winning ball number is immediately issued without waiting for 1 s (1 second). This is sent to the payout control microcomputer 370. Also in this case, the gaming control microcomputer 560 does not set a value indicating an error in the lower 4 bits of the previously received connection OK command or the winning ball preparation command (see FIG. 25), and The award ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 on the condition that the winning prize is received from the reception of the ball end command until 1 second elapses. Thereafter, transmission and reception of control commands are repeated according to the same sequence.

  FIG. 30 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer when the winning ball operation cannot be executed immediately. Even if the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the award ball number command, if it is in the lending ball payout operation or is in an error state, the award ball number specified by the received award ball number command. Unable to start the prize ball payout operation. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 30, even when the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the prize ball number command, it does not immediately send the prize ball number acceptance command, and the prize ball payout operation is completed. A command for preparing a prize ball for notifying that the game is not being sent is transmitted to the microcomputer 560 for game control. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 370 is in a state of preparing a prize ball at regular intervals (every 1 s) unless the payout operation of the lending ball is completed and the award ball action can be started or the error is not canceled. The command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the payout control microcomputer 370 finishes the lending ball payout operation and becomes ready to start the next prize ball operation, or when the error is canceled, the prize indicating that the number of prize balls has been received is received. The ball number acceptance command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560 via the serial communication circuit 380. If the prize ball payout is not completed within 1 s (1 second) from the time when the prize ball number acceptance command is transmitted, the prize ball is being prepared after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the prize ball number acceptance command is transmitted. Send a command. Thereafter, until the completion of the payout of the winning ball, the winning ball preparation command is repeatedly transmitted every 1 s (1 second) after the winning ball preparation command is transmitted. Also, a payout operation for the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command is executed, and when the prize ball payout operation is completed, a prize ball end command indicating the end of the prize ball payout operation is played via the serial communication circuit 380. It transmits to the control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 31, when the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the connection confirmation command to the payout control microcomputer 370, the game control microcomputer 560 receives the connection OK command transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370. When the game control microcomputer 560 receives the connection OK command, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the connection confirmation command again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command and transmitting the next connection confirmation command), the game control microcomputer 560 The control for repeatedly transmitting the confirmation command is interrupted, data indicating the number of winning balls is set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the set winning ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. Upon receiving the prize ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball number reception command to the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of subtracting the prize ball number storage based on the reception of the prize ball number reception command (specifically, 1 is subtracted from a prize ball command output counter described later). (See step S52404). Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and when the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation) is completed, the prize ball end command is sent to the game control microcomputer. Send to computer 560. As described above, when the winning ball payout operation takes a long time, the payout control microcomputer 370 waits for 1 s (1 second) until the winning ball payout operation is completed. Is sent repeatedly. When the game control microcomputer 560 receives the prize ball end command, if the number of prize balls to be paid out is not yet stored, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a connection confirmation command after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. To do.

  If there is a prize during the execution of the connection confirmation communication process (between sending the connection confirmation command and receiving the connection OK command), the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 Since the connection state is not confirmed, the award ball number command is not immediately transmitted, but the process waits until the connection OK command can be confirmed. When the connection OK command is received from the payout control microcomputer 370, the game control microcomputer 560 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and sets the set number of winning balls. The command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. Upon receiving the prize ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball number reception command to the game control microcomputer 560. Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs the same processing, pays out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, and when the prize ball is paid out (prize ball payout operation), The ball end command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

  After receiving the winning ball end command, the game control microcomputer 560 does not set a value indicating an error in the lower 4 bits of the previously received connection OK command or winning ball preparation command (see FIG. 25). In addition, even when the start winning prize is received from the reception of the winning ball end command until 1 second elapses, the winning ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. In other words, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 receives a prize ball end command from when a connection OK signal in which a value indicating an error is not set until one second elapses. The award ball number command can be transmitted until 1 second has passed.

  FIG. 32 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer when an error occurs in the winning ball. As shown in FIG. 32, when the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the connection confirmation command to the payout control microcomputer 370, the game control microcomputer 560 receives the connection OK command transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370. If there is a win when the communication process for confirming the connection is not executed, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the data indicating the number of winning balls in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the set winning prize is set. The ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. Upon receiving the prize ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball number reception command to the game control microcomputer 560. Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. When executing the payout operation for the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, a predetermined error (for example, an abnormal payout number error, a ball lending, a full tank, or an out of ball error) occurs. When the ball payout operation cannot be performed (abnormal state, error state), the payout control microcomputer 370 issues a prize ball preparing command for notifying that an error has occurred and the prize ball payout operation has not ended. It transmits to the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball preparing command to the game control microcomputer 560 at regular intervals (every 1 s) unless the generated error is canceled. When the predetermined error state is canceled (resolved) and the winning ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a winning ball end command to the game control microcomputer 560. The award ball preparation command is transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 every 1 s after the award ball number acceptance command is transmitted. Further, while the game control microcomputer 560 is receiving a command for preparing a prize ball, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled not to transmit a connection confirmation command. Specifically, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs a prize ball end command based on the completion of the prize ball payout operation, and the game control microcomputer 560 receives the prize ball end command. Based on this, control is performed so as to return to a state in which a connection confirmation command is output every predetermined period (1S).

  FIG. 33 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer when a communication error occurs during connection confirmation. As shown in FIG. 33, the game control microcomputer 560 has transmitted the connection confirmation command to the payout control microcomputer 370, but has not received the connection OK command from the payout control microcomputer 370, that is, When a connection state abnormality (communication error) occurs, the connection confirmation command is transmitted again after 10 s (10 seconds) have elapsed since the connection confirmation command was transmitted. In other words, if the process of transmitting the connection confirmation command every 1 s (1 second) when the connection OK command cannot be received is continued, the number of connection confirmation command transmissions is increased even though the communication state is unstable. Since it increases in vain, the transmission interval of the connection confirmation command is extended to 10 s (10 seconds), and the control is switched to transmitting the connection confirmation command with the minimum necessary number of transmissions until the communication state is recovered. If a winning occurs when a communication error has occurred, the game control microcomputer 560 will receive a connection OK command from the payout controlling microcomputer 370, even if a new winning occurs. Without transmitting the award ball number command, the connection confirmation command is continuously transmitted at regular intervals (10 s). When the communication error is canceled (resolved) and a connection OK command is transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a prize ball number command.

  FIG. 34 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer when a communication error occurs during the award ball number notification. As shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 560 has transmitted a prize ball number command based on the occurrence of a win, but has not received a prize ball number acceptance command from the payout control microcomputer 370. In this case, that is, when a connection state abnormality (communication error) occurs, a connection confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 after 10 seconds (10 seconds) have elapsed since the prize ball number command was transmitted. Then, the connection confirmation command is repeatedly transmitted every 10 s (10 seconds) until the communication state is recovered. Thereafter, when the communication error is canceled (resolved) and the connection OK command is received from the payout control microcomputer 370, the award game control microcomputer 560 returns to the normal (normal) operation, and the number of winning balls The command is retransmitted (retryed) to the payout control microcomputer 370. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 does not subtract the prize ball number storage if it does not receive the prize ball number acceptance command even after sending the prize ball number command (described later). If N in step S52403, the value of the prize ball command output counter in step S52404 is not subtracted by 1), and the value of the prize ball command output counter is maintained as it is when the prize ball number command is transmitted next time. The prize ball number command is retransmitted based on that (see steps S52301 to S52035 described later).

  Next, the prize ball process (step S32) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S32. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), the prize ball command output counter addition process (step S501), the prize ball control process (step S502), and the prize ball counter subtraction process (step S503). ).

  In the prize ball command output counter addition process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 36 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “4”) is set to the start address of the prize ball number table, and then the lower address of the switch-on buffer, the prize ball command output counter, and the prize ball designation for designating the number of prize balls Data is set sequentially. The prize ball command output counter is a counter that counts the number of prizes received in the prize opening, and is set in the ROM 54, for example. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a corresponding prize ball command output counter for each number of prize balls (0 to 15). In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a prize ball command output counter 1 corresponding to the prize ball number “15” and prize ball command output counters 2, 3 (2) corresponding to the prize ball number “10”. Corresponding to the normal winning ports 29 and 30) and a prize ball command output counter 4 corresponding to the number of prize balls “3”. Each prize ball command output counter is counted up by prize ball command output counter addition processing, as will be described later. If the prize ball command output counter 1 set in the prize ball number table is not 0, the CPU 56 indicates the number of prize balls (15) based on the prize ball designation data for designating the number of prize balls (15). The data is set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the set winning ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. The CPU 56 determines the number of prize balls (10) if the value of the prize ball command output counter 1 set in the prize ball number table is 0 and the value of the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 is not 0. Is set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the set winning ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. To do. Further, the CPU 56 determines that the values of the prize ball command output counter 1 and the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 set in the prize ball number table are 0 and the value of the prize ball command output counter 4 is not 0. Based on the prize ball designation data for designating the number of prize balls (3), data indicating the number of prize balls (3) is set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball number command, and the set prize ball number command is issued. It transmits to the control microcomputer 370. In FIG. 36, the switch-on buffer 1 corresponds to the input port 0, and the switch-on buffer 2 corresponds to the input port 2.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the prize ball command output counter addition processing in step S501. In the prize ball command output counter addition process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) sets the start address of the prize ball number table as a pointer (step S5101). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S5102).

  Next, the CPU 56 increments the pointer value by 1 (step S5103), loads the lower address of the switch-on buffer pointed to by the pointer into the lower byte of the pointer buffer (step S5104), and loads the switch-on buffer pointed by the pointer buffer into the register. (Step S5105). Next, the CPU 56 increments the value of the pointer by 1 (step S5106), and loads the lower address of the prize ball command output counter pointed to by the pointer into the lower byte of the pointer buffer (step S5107). Next, the CPU 56 increments the value of the pointer by 1 (step S5108), and calculates the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer loaded in the register and the prize ball designation data pointed to by the pointer (step S5109).

  If the calculation result in step S5109 is 0 (Y in step S5110), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not on, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S5114), and if the number of processes is 0 The process ends, and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S5103 (step S5115).

  If the calculation result in step S5109 is not 0 (N in step S5110), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the prize ball command output counter pointed to by the pointer. (Step S111). However, when a carry occurs in the value of the prize ball command output counter as a result of the addition, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the prize ball command output counter and restores the original value (steps S5112, S5113). Then, the process proceeds to step S5113.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control process in step S502. In the prize ball control process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) executes any one of steps S521 to S525 in accordance with the value of the prize ball process code.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the prize ball transmission process 1 (step S521) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is zero. In the prize ball transmission process 1, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a connection confirmation command to the payout control microcomputer (step S5211). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs processing for outputting a connection confirmation command to the transmission data register of the serial communication circuit 505. Then, the CPU 56 sets a value “1” indicating a prize ball connection confirmation process in the prize ball process code (step S5212), and sets a connection confirmation time 2 (for example, 10 seconds) in the prize ball process timer (step S5213). . If a connection OK command is not received even after 10 seconds have elapsed after transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the connection confirmation time 2 set in step S5213, the connection confirmation command is transmitted thereafter. It is controlled so as to extend the interval to 10 seconds. Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S5213 is measured in the process of step S5229, which will be described later, 10 seconds elapses without receiving a connection OK command, and the determination is Y in step S5227. Then, it returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S5228 and S5211).

  The prize ball process timer is set to a value (for example, an integral multiple of the interrupt period) in consideration of the interrupt period in the timer interrupt process executed by the game control microcomputer 560. This is because other timers used in the game control microcomputer 560, the payout control microcomputer 370, and the effect control microcomputer 100 (for example, a main control communication control timer, a payout control timer, a re-payout waiting timer, The same applies to the prize ball information output timer and prize ball signal 1 output timer.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a prize ball connection confirmation process (step S522) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 1. In the winning ball connection confirmation process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether there is data in the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S5221). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm the value of bit 5 of the status register A of the serial communication circuit 505 (see FIG. 14). If there is no data in the reception data register (that is, if no command is received), the process proceeds to step S5227.

  If there is data in the reception data register (that is, if a command is received), the CPU 56 checks whether an error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505 (step S5222). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm whether or not any error bit value of bits 0 to 4 of the status register A of the serial communication circuit 505 is set (see FIG. 14). If an error has occurred, the CPU 56 reads data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S5222A), and proceeds to step S5227. Note that reading the data in step S5222A clears the contents of the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 and clears bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A. However, the received data read in step S5222A is discarded as it is. That is, in this embodiment, the reception data read in step S5222A is read from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 by the CPU 56 and written to the register of the CPU 56, and is not written to the RAM 55. It is not used for any subsequent processing. This also applies to other processes for discarding data by reading received data from the received data register in this embodiment.

  The method of discarding received data is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the CPU 56 may clear the contents of the reception data register and discard the reception data by initializing the reception circuit (reception unit) of the serial communication circuit 505. If the received data register is not automatically cleared by reading the received data, the CPU 56 performs processing for clearing the contents of the received data register or the receiving circuit of the serial communication circuit 505. The received data may be discarded by performing a process of initializing the (receiving unit). Further, for example, the serial communication circuit 505 clears the contents of the reception data register in hardware (for example, the interrupt control circuit 714 of the serial communication circuit 505 clears the contents of the reception data register), thereby receiving the reception data. It may be configured to be discarded.

  After reading the received data in step S5222A, the CPU 56 determines N in step S5221 until the next command is received, and when 10 seconds set in step S5213 have elapsed without receiving the command, the award is received in step S5227. The ball process timer times out. Then, the process proceeds to the prize ball transmission process 1 (see step S5228), and the connection confirmation command is transmitted again (see step S5211).

  If no error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 reads the command from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505, and checks whether the received command is a connection OK command (step S5223). If it is not a connection OK command, the process proceeds to step S5227.

  If the connection OK command has been received, the CPU 56 stores the error information (see FIG. 25) set in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command in the frame state display buffer (step S5224).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value “2” indicating the prize ball transmission process 2 in the prize ball process code (step S5225), and sets a connection confirmation time 1 (for example, 1 second) in the prize ball process timer (step S5226). . Note that, based on the connection confirmation time 1 set in step S5226, control is performed to repeatedly transmit the next connection confirmation command every time one second elapses after receiving the connection OK command. Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S5226 is measured in the process of step S52315 described later, and a timeout occurs after 1 second has passed without sending a prize ball number command, and it is determined as Y in step S52313. Then, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S52314 and S5211).

  In step S5227, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball process timer has timed out. If the winning ball process timer has timed out (that is, if the connection OK command has not been received even after 10 seconds have passed after sending the connection confirmation command), the CPU 56 sends a winning ball to the winning ball process code. A value “0” indicating the process 1 is set (step S5228), and the process ends. If the winning ball process timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball process timer (step S5229).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the prize ball transmission process 2 (step S523) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 2. In the prize ball transmission process 2, the CPU 56 checks whether or not any prize ball command output counters 1 to 4 have a count value other than 0 (step S52301). If there is no count value other than 0, the process proceeds to step S52313.

  If any of the prize ball command output counters 1 to 4 has a count value other than 0 (that is, if the count value is 1 or more), the CPU 56 loads the contents of the frame state display buffer. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the content of the frame state display buffer is 0 (step S5232). If the content of the frame state display buffer is not 0, the processing is terminated as it is. By performing such control, when the connection OK command in which the error information is set is received and the payout control microcomputer 370 is controlled to be in the payout stop state, the process does not proceed to step S52303 and subsequent steps. Then, control is made so that transmission of the prize ball number command is suspended.

  If the content of the frame state display buffer is 0 (that is, if no error relating to payout has occurred), the payout control CPU 371 determines the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command output counter whose count value is not 0. The buffer is set (step S52303). Specifically, in step S52301, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the count value of the prize ball command output counter 1 is zero. If the count value of the prize ball command output counter 1 is 1 or more, in step S52303, the CPU 56 sets 15 prize balls in the number buffer. In step S52301, if the count value of the prize ball command output counter 1 is 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the count values of the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 are 0 or not. If the count value of the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 is 1 or more, the CPU 56 sets the number of prize balls in the number buffer in step S52303. In step S52301, if the count value of the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 is also 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the count value of the prize ball command output counter 4 is 0 or not. If the count value of the prize ball command output counter 4 is 1 or more, in step S52303, the CPU 56 sets the number of prize balls to 3 in the number buffer.

  In addition, the CPU 56 sets the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command output counter whose count value is not 0 in the prize ball number command (step S52304), and uses the prize ball number command in which the number of prize balls is set for payout control. Control to transmit to the microcomputer 370 is performed (step S52305). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs a process of outputting a prize ball number command in which the prize ball number is set to the transmission data register of the serial communication circuit 505.

  By executing the processing of steps S52301 and S52305, in this embodiment, if there is a prize ball command output counter whose count value is not 0 regardless of the connection confirmation command transmission timing (ie, If there is a prize ball number storage and a predetermined payout condition is established), a prize ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a value “3” indicating the prize ball reception confirmation process in the prize ball process code (step S52306), and sets a connection confirmation time 2 (for example, 10 seconds) in the prize ball process timer (step S52307). . It should be noted that, based on the connection confirmation time 2 set in step S52307, after transmitting the prize ball number command, it is confirmed whether a prize ball number acceptance command or a prize ball preparation command is received within 10 seconds. . Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S52307 is measured in the process of step S52411 to be described later, and 10 seconds elapses without receiving a prize ball number acceptance command or a prize ball preparation command. If it is determined as Y in step S52409, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S52410 and S5211).

  If the prize ball number command is transmitted in step S52305 by executing the process of step S52306, the process proceeds to the prize ball reception confirmation process without returning to the prize ball transmission process 1 including the connection confirmation command transmission process. Is done. Therefore, in this embodiment, the process of repeatedly transmitting the connection confirmation command is executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 second) until the prize ball number command is transmitted, but the prize ball number command is transmitted. In particular, the control for transmitting the connection confirmation command is stopped (more specifically, after the prize ball number command is transmitted, the process proceeds to the prize ball end confirmation process by receiving the prize ball number acceptance command described later. (See steps S52403 to S52405) or by receiving the winning ball preparation command and repeating the winning ball receipt confirmation process (see steps S52406 to S52408), without returning to the winning ball transmission process 1 In this case, the control for sending the confirmation command is stopped. Unless an abnormal state occurs in which no payout control command is returned, after the prize ball number command is transmitted, the game control microcomputer 560 is connected until the prize ball payout operation is finished and the prize ball end command is received. A confirmation command is never sent.

  Next, the CPU 56 adds the value of the number buffer set in step S52303 to the prize ball number counter (step S52308), and whether or not the added count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined prize ball shortage determination value (eg, 501). Is confirmed (step S52309). In this embodiment, the prize ball number counter is a counter used for grasping the number of prize balls that have not been paid out on the game control microcomputer 560 side, and when the prize ball number command is transmitted, The number of prize balls designated in (1) is added, and every time ten prize balls are paid out, 10 is subtracted based on the prize ball information output from the payout control microcomputer 370. Further, as described above, the prize ball number counter is set to “250” as an initial value in the initial setting process of the main process. When the count value of the prize ball counter reaches a predetermined prize ball shortage determination value (for example, 501) or more, the number of prize balls that have not been paid out is excessively large. Can be determined. Further, when the count value of the prize ball number counter is less than a predetermined prize ball excess determination value (for example, 0), an abnormally large number of game balls are paid out in excess of the number to be paid out originally. Therefore, it can be determined that an excessive number of prize balls has occurred.

  In this embodiment, the prize ball number counter is added (see step S52308) immediately after the prize ball number command is transmitted (see step S52305). However, the prize ball number command is transmitted. For example, a prize ball number command may be transmitted immediately after the addition process of the prize ball number counter is executed.

  When it is determined that there is a shortage of prize balls, the signal line for outputting the prize ball information is disconnected in addition to the case where some trouble occurs on the payout control microcomputer 370 side and the payout operation cannot be performed normally. Cases are also conceivable. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of prize balls is excessive, a prize ball number command is transmitted in addition to the case where some kind of trouble occurs on the payout control microcomputer 370 side and the payout operation is performed more than necessary. It is also conceivable that some injustice is applied to the command line and the prize ball number command is illegally input to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  When the count value of the prize ball number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined prize ball shortage determination value (for example, 501), the CPU 56 displays a prize ball error flag indicating that a prize ball shortage or a prize ball excess has occurred. It is confirmed whether it has already been set (step S52310). If the prize ball error flag has already been set, the process is terminated. If the prize ball error flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets a prize ball error flag (step S52311) and controls to send a prize ball shortage error command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S52312). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the address of the winning ball shortage error command transmission table as a pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the winning ball shortage error command transmission table is set in the pointer in step S52312, the serial communication circuit of the transmission / reception channel with the effect control board 80 in the effect symbol command control processing in step S30. A prize ball shortage error command is output to the transmission data register 505, and the prize ball shortage error command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Note that once the prize ball error flag is set, it is maintained without being cleared until the power supply to the gaming machine is turned on again after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. In this embodiment, regarding the communication between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100, a command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100. Only, not the other way around. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 may be equipped with a transmission-only serial communication circuit for communication with the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, based on the reception of a prize ball shortage error command or a prize ball excess error command described later, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs an error notification of prize ball shortage or prize ball excess. However, the error notification of insufficient prize balls or excessive prize balls may be recovered when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of notification. Further, for example, when the value of the prize ball number counter returns to a range of a predetermined prize ball shortage determination value (for example, 501) or a predetermined prize ball excess determination value (for example, 0), the prize ball shortage or the prize ball is excessive. It is also possible to recover from the error notification.

  In this embodiment, the case where the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number counter at the timing at which the prize ball number command is transmitted in step S52308 is shown. For example, the number of prize balls may be subtracted instead of the one shown in the embodiment. In this case, for example, in the process of step S5311 to be described later, on the contrary, 10 may be added to the value of the winning ball counter based on the input of winning ball information. In the process of step S52309, if the value of the prize ball number counter is less than 0, it is determined that there is a prize ball shortage error. In the process of step S5312 described later, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 501 or more, a prize ball What is necessary is just to determine with an excess error.

  In step S52313, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball process timer has timed out. If the winning ball process timer has timed out (that is, if no winning ball has been stored and no new winning has occurred by the time one second has elapsed after receiving the connection OK command), the CPU 56 Then, the value “0” indicating the prize ball transmission process 1 is set in the prize ball process code (step S52314), and the process ends. If the winning ball process timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball process timer (step S52315).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the winning ball reception confirmation process (step S524) executed when the value of the winning ball process code is 3. In the winning ball receipt confirmation process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not there is data in the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S52401). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm the value of bit 5 of the status register A of the serial communication circuit 505 (see FIG. 14). If there is no data in the reception data register (that is, if no command is received), the process proceeds to step S52409.

  If there is data in the reception data register (that is, if a command is received), the CPU 56 checks whether or not an error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505 (step S52402). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm whether or not any error bit value of bits 0 to 4 of the status register A of the serial communication circuit 505 is set (see FIG. 14). If an error has occurred, the CPU 56 reads data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S52402A), and proceeds to step S52409. Note that reading the data in step S52402A clears the contents of the received data register of the serial communication circuit 505 and clears bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A. However, the received data read in step S52402A is discarded as it is. That is, in this embodiment, the reception data read in step S52402A is read from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 by the CPU 56 and written to the register of the CPU 56, but not written to the RAM 55. It is not used for any subsequent processing.

  After reading the received data in step S52402A, the CPU 56 determines N in step S52401 until the next command is received, and when 10 seconds set in step S52307 have elapsed without receiving the command, the award is received in step S52409. The ball process timer times out. Then, the process proceeds to prize ball transmission processing 1 (see step S52410), and the connection confirmation command is transmitted again (see step S5211).

  If no error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 reads the command from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505, and checks whether or not the received command is a prize ball number acceptance command (step S52403). . If the winning ball number reception command has been received, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball command output counter corresponding to the winning ball number set by the transmitted winning ball number command (step S52404). In addition, the CPU 56 sets a value “4” indicating a prize ball end confirmation process in the prize ball process code (step S52405), and proceeds to step S52408.

  If the received command is not a prize ball number acceptance command, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the received command is a prize ball preparation command (step S52406). If it is not a prize ball preparation command, the process advances to step S52409.

  If the winning ball preparation command has been received, the CPU 56 stores the error information (see FIG. 25) set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball preparation command in the frame state display buffer (step S52407). Then, the CPU 56 sets the connection confirmation time 2 (for example, 10 seconds) in the prize ball process timer (step S52408). In addition, after receiving the prize ball preparation command based on the connection confirmation time 2 set in step S52408, neither the prize ball number acceptance command nor the next prize ball preparation command can be received after 10 seconds. If it is, the process returns to the control for transmitting the connection confirmation command. Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S52408 is measured in the processing of steps S52409 and S52411 described later, and 10 seconds are received without receiving a prize ball number acceptance command or a next prize ball preparation command. When the time-out occurs and it is determined as Y in step S52409, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S52410 and S5211).

  In step S52409, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball process timer has timed out. If the prize ball process timer has timed out (that is, if no prize ball number acceptance command or prize ball preparation command is received after 10 seconds have passed since the prize ball number command was transmitted), the CPU 56 Then, the value “0” indicating the prize ball transmission process 1 is set in the prize ball process code (step S52410), and the process ends. If the winning ball process timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball process timer (step S52411).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the winning ball end confirmation process (step S525) executed when the value of the winning ball process code is 4. In the winning ball end confirmation process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not there is data in the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S52501). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm the value of bit 5 of the status register A of the serial communication circuit 505 (see FIG. 14). If there is no data in the reception data register (that is, if no command is received), the process proceeds to step S52509.

  If there is data in the reception data register (that is, if a command is received), the CPU 56 checks whether an error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505 (step S52502). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm whether or not any error bit value of bits 0 to 4 of the status register A of the serial communication circuit 505 is set (see FIG. 14). If an error has occurred, the CPU 56 reads data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S52502A), and proceeds to step S52509. Note that reading the data in step S52502A clears the contents of the received data register of the serial communication circuit 505 and clears bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A. However, the received data read in step S52502A is discarded as it is. That is, in this embodiment, the reception data read in step S52502A is read from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 by the CPU 56 and written to the register of the CPU 56, but not written to the RAM 55. It is not used for any subsequent processing.

  After reading the received data in step S52502A, the CPU 56 determines N in step S52501 until the next command is received, and when 10 seconds set in step S52408 have elapsed without receiving the command, the award is received in step S52509. The ball process timer times out. Then, the process shifts to prize ball transmission processing 1 (see step S52510), and the connection confirmation command is transmitted again (see step S5211).

  If no error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 reads the command from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505, and checks whether the received command is a prize ball end command (step S52503). If the winning ball end command has been received, the CPU 56 sets a value “2” indicating the winning ball transmission process 2 in the winning ball process code (step S52504), and the connection check time 1 (for example, 1) is set in the winning ball process timer. Second) is set (step S52505). It should be noted that, based on the connection confirmation time 1 set in step S52505, the control for transmitting the connection confirmation command when the start winning prize does not occur even after one second has elapsed after receiving the prize ball end command. Return to. Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S52505 is measured by the processing in steps S52313 and S52315, and one second has elapsed without sending a prize ball number command without generating a new start prize. If time-out occurs and it is determined as Y in step S52313, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S52314 and S5211).

  Since the process of step S52504 is executed, when a prize ball end command is received, the process first proceeds to prize ball transmission process 2. Therefore, when the number of prize balls is stored, the next is immediately performed. Control is performed so that a winning ball number command is transmitted. On the other hand, after the transition to the prize ball transmission process 2, there is no memorized number of prize balls, and a new prize is also generated until the connection confirmation time 1 (for example, 1 second) set in step S52505 has elapsed. If not, the process further proceeds to a prize ball transmission process 1, and the process of repeatedly transmitting the connection confirmation command is resumed.

  If the received command is not a prize ball end command, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the received command is a prize ball preparation command (step S52506). If it is not a prize ball preparation command, the process advances to step S52509.

  If the winning ball preparation command has been received, the CPU 56 stores the error information (see FIG. 25) set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball preparation command in the frame state display buffer (step S52507). Then, the CPU 56 sets the connection confirmation time 2 (for example, 10 seconds) in the prize ball process timer (step S52508). In addition, after receiving the winning ball preparation command based on the connection confirmation time 2 set in step S52508, neither the winning ball end command nor the next winning ball preparation command could be received after 10 seconds. In this case, the process returns to the control for transmitting the connection confirmation command. Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S52508 is measured in the process of step S52511 described later, and 10 seconds have elapsed without receiving a prize ball end command or a next prize ball preparation command. If time-out occurs and it is determined as Y in step S52509, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S52510 and S5211).

  In step S52509, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball process timer has timed out. If the prize ball process timer has timed out (that is, the prize ball end command or the prize ball preparation command cannot be received even after 10 seconds have passed since the prize ball number acceptance command or prize ball preparation command is received) In this case, the CPU 56 sets a value “0” indicating the prize ball transmission process 1 in the prize ball process code (step S52510), and ends the process. If the winning ball process timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball process timer (step S52511).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball counter subtraction process in step S503. In the prize ball counter subtraction process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the prize ball information input invalid timer has timed out (step S5301). The prize ball information input invalid timer is a timer that is measured in order to provide an interval period after confirming the input of prize ball information until confirming the next prize ball information. If not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the prize ball information input invalid timer (step S5302) and ends the process.

  If the prize ball information input invalid timer has timed out, the CPU 56 inputs the contents of the input port 0 (step S5303), and checks whether or not the bit of the prize ball information is on (step S5304). If the bit of the prize ball information is on, the process proceeds to step S5305.

  In step S5305, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined prize ball information confirmation count (for example, 8) as the number of processes (step S5305). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the prize ball information is input, and if the input of the prize ball information can be confirmed, the CPU 56 adds the value of the prize ball information on counter to 1 and the number of processes (8 in this example). The process is repeated until the process is completed (steps S5306 to S5308).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball information on counter is 6 or more (step S5309). If the value of the prize ball information on counter is 6 or more, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the prize ball information input invalid timer (step S5310) and sets the value of the prize ball number counter to 10 Subtraction is performed (step S5311).

  By executing the above processing, in this embodiment, it is determined that the prize ball information has been inputted on the condition that the prize ball information has been inputted 6 times or more out of the 8 confirmation processes, and 10 pieces of prize ball information are entered. The value of the prize ball number counter is decremented by 10 assuming that the prize ball has been paid out. By such processing, in this embodiment, the situation where it is determined that the prize ball information is erroneously input is reduced, and the game control microcomputer 560 side cannot properly grasp the number of prize balls that have not been paid out. It is preventing.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value after subtraction is less than a predetermined prize ball excess determination value (for example, 0) (step S5312). When the count value of the prize ball number counter is less than a predetermined prize ball excess determination value (for example, 0), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball error flag is already set (step S5313). If the prize ball error flag has already been set, the process is terminated. If the prize ball error flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets the prize ball error flag (step S5314) and controls to send a prize ball excess error command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S5315). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the address of the winning ball excessive error command transmission table as a pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the winning ball excess error command transmission table is set in the pointer in step S5315, in the effect symbol command control process in step S30, the serial communication circuit of the transmission / reception channel with the effect control board 80 is performed. The award ball excessive error command is output to the transmission data register 505, and the award ball excessive error command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Next, the frame state output process (step S39) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the frame state output process in step S39. In the frame state output process, the CPU 56 first loads the contents of the frame state display buffer (step S391). Next, the CPU 56 inputs the content of the input port 0 (step S392) and logically ANDs the input port 0 content with a predetermined door opening signal confirmation mask value (specifically 01000000). (Step S393). Further, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the operation result obtained by the logical product and the contents of the frame state display buffer loaded in step S391 (step S394). By executing the above processing, a calculation result is obtained in which the door opening signal input state is further added to the contents of the frame state display buffer.

  Next, the CPU 56 compares the calculation result with the contents of the previous frame state display buffer (step S395). The previous frame state display buffer stores the calculation result of step S394 calculated when the frame state output processing is executed by the previous timer interrupt. When the calculation result is different from the content of the previous frame state display buffer (Y in step S396), the CPU 56 stores the calculation result calculated in step S394 in the previous frame state display buffer and updates the previous frame state display buffer. Along with (Step S397), the calculation result calculated in Step S394 is set as it is to the frame state display command, and control is performed to transmit the frame state display command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (Step S398). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the address of the frame state display command transmission table in the pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the frame state display command transmission table is set in the pointer in step S398, in the effect symbol command control processing in step S30, the serial communication circuit 505 for the channel for transmission / reception with the effect control board 80 is performed. The frame state display command is output to the transmission data register, and the frame state display command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  By executing the above processing, the error information set by the connection OK command or the winning ball preparation command from the payout control microcomputer 560 (payout number error error, out of ball error, full tank error, winning ball error) And the input state of the door opening signal are set in the frame state display command and transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Next, the special symbol process (step S28) in the main process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560. The CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 has the start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 being turned on, that is, the game ball is starting start winning. If a winning is received at the opening 14 and the winning detection signal SS is input from the start opening switch 14a (step S311), after the start opening switch passing process (step S312) is performed, the processing of steps S300 to S306 is performed according to the internal state. Do one of these processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): A state in which variable symbol special display can be started (for example, the symbol variation has not been made in the special symbol display 8, and the previous symbol variation in the special symbol display 8 has been completed. Waits for a predetermined period of time to elapse, and not a big hit game). When the special symbol variable display can be started, the start winning memory number for the special symbol is confirmed. If the number of starting winning prizes is not 0, it is determined whether or not the result of variable symbol special display is a big hit based on the random R generated by the random number circuit 503 stored in the special figure holding memory. Further, when it is determined to be a big hit, control for transmitting a display result designation command capable of specifying the determined display result to the microcomputer 100 for effect control is further determined, such as whether or not to make a probable big hit. I do. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S301.

  Fluctuation time setting process (step S301): A variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern in the variation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is a special symbol. It is determined to be a variable display variable time. In addition, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command specifying the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the determined special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S302.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S302): When a predetermined time (the time indicated by the variation time timer in step S301) elapses, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S303.

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): An effect symbol stop command for instructing stop of the effect symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Moreover, the special symbol in the special symbol display 8 is stopped. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. If not, the internal state is updated to shift to step S300. In addition, it is good also as a structure which does not transmit an effect design stop command. In this case, the effect control board 80 sets the change time in the change time timer based on the change pattern command received from the main board 31 and updates the change time timer to uniquely change the change time of the effect symbol. Monitoring, and when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed, a process of stopping the effect design may be performed.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S304): Control for opening the large winning opening is started. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening) and a flag (a flag used when detecting winning in the prize opening) are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven. Open the big prize opening. Also, the process timer sets the execution time of the big prize opening opening process and sets the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S305.

  Processing for opening a special prize opening (step S305): Control for sending a presentation control command for round display of the special prize opening to the production control board 80 and closing conditions for the special prize opening (for example, a predetermined number (for example, ten) for the special prize opening ) To confirm that the game ball has won a prize). When the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, if there are still rounds, the internal state is updated to shift to step S304. When all the rounds have been completed, the internal state is updated to shift to step S306.

  Big hit end processing (step S306): Control for causing the effect control means to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state is updated so as to shift to step S300.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passage process (step S312). In the start-port switch passing process, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets the start-winning memory number indicated by the start-winning memory counter (or the start-winning memory number stored in the special figure holding memory) to 4 which is the maximum value. It is confirmed whether it has reached (step S321). If the start winning memorized number has not reached 4, the CPU 56 reads the value of random R stored as the random number value from the random value memory circuit of the random number circuit 503 (step S322). Further, the CPU 56 stores the read random R value in a storage area (special symbol determination buffer (special symbol holding memory)) corresponding to the value of the number of start winning memories (step S323). In this embodiment, the random number circuit 503 inputs an input signal from the start port switch 14a as a latch signal. In this case, the random number circuit 503 latches the counter value of the counter built in the random number circuit 503 in the random value storage circuit (latch circuit) at the timing when the input signal is input from the start port switch 14a. In step S322, the CPU 56 reads the value latched in the random value storage circuit of the random number circuit 503 as a random R.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the value of the random R stored in the predetermined buffer area to the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation memory (step S324), and adds 1 to the count number of the start prize counter, thereby increasing the number of start winning memories. Is increased by 1 (step S325).

  Note that if the start winning memorization is stored in step S321 but the maximum value of 4 is reached, the start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 can start the variation of the special symbol (for example, when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300). (Step S380), the random R value stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” is read from the special figure hold memory (step S381). In this case, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count number of the start winning counter, thereby reducing the number of reserved memories by 1 and assigns to the second to fourth entries (holding numbers “2” to “4”) of the special figure reservation memory. The stored random R value is shifted up by one entry (step S382).

  Further, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S383). That is, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is controlled to the certain change state. When the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a normal state other than the probability variation state, and is a table used for determining whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. The normal big hit determination table 571a (see FIG. 18A) is set (step S384). Further, when the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a probability change state, and as a table used to determine whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. A probability change big hit determination table 571b (see FIG. 18B) is set (step S385).

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a big hit symbol based on the random R value stored in the predetermined buffer area in the start port switch passing process (step S386). In this case, the CPU 56 uses the normal-time big hit determination table 571a set in step S384 or the probability change big hit determination table 571b set in step S385 to determine whether or not to win.

  If it is determined that the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol, the CPU 56 turns on a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot state (step S387). If it is determined that the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is not to be a big hit symbol, the CPU 56 turns off the big hit flag (step S388). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation time setting process (step S389).

  Next, the switch process (step S21) in the timer interrupt process will be described. In this embodiment, when the ON state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is surely turned on, and processing corresponding to the switch on is started. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing each 2-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switching process. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the previous switch-on / off determination result (for example, 4 ms before) is stored. The port buffer is a buffer for storing the contents of the ports 0 and 1 input this time. The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which the corresponding bit is set to 1 when switch on is detected and the corresponding bit is set to 0 when switch off is detected. Note that the previous port buffer, port buffer, and switch-on buffer shown in FIG. 49 are prepared for each of the input ports 0 and 1. For example, in this embodiment, two switch-on buffers 1 and 2 are prepared, the switch state of the input port 0 is set to the switch-on buffer 1, and the switch state of the input port 1 is the switch-on buffer 2. Set to

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a processing example of the switch processing in step S21 in the game control processing. In the switch process, the game control microcomputer 560 first inputs data input to the input ports 0 and 1 (see FIG. 20) (step S101), and sets the input data in the port buffer (step S102). ).

  Next, the initial value of the weight counter formed in the RAM 55 is set (step S103), and the value of the weight counter is decremented by 1 until the value of the weight counter becomes 0 (steps S104 and S105).

  When the value of the wait counter reaches 0, the data of the input ports 0 and 1 are input again (step S106), and a logical product is obtained for each bit between the input data and the data set in the port buffer. (Step S107). Then, the logical product operation result is set in the port buffer (step S108). Of the two input data input from the input port 0 with a time interval of approximately [initial value of weight counter × (processing time of steps S104, S105)] by the processing of steps S103 to S108, both “ Only the bits that are “1” will be “1” in the port buffer. In other words, if the ON state of the switch detection signal continues for a predetermined period [initial value of wait counter × (processing time of steps S104 and S105)], the corresponding bit in the port buffer becomes “1”.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs exclusive OR for each bit between the data previously set in the port buffer and the data set in the port buffer (step S109). In the result of the exclusive OR operation, the bit corresponding to the switch for which the previous switch-on / off determination result (for example, 4 ms before) differs from the switch-on / off determination result determined to be on this time is “ 1 ”. The game control microcomputer 560 further performs a logical product for each bit between the exclusive OR operation result and the data set in the port buffer (step S110). As a result, of the bits corresponding to the switches for which the previous switch on / off determination result and the switch on / off determination result determined to be on this time are different (according to the exclusive OR operation result), the current on Only the bit corresponding to the switch determined to be (by AND operation) remains as “1”.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the logical product calculation result in step S110 in the switch-on buffer (step S111), and sets the contents of the port buffer in which the calculation result in step S108 is set in the previous port buffer. (Step S112).

  By the above processing, among the switches that have been on for a predetermined period of time, the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (for example, 4 ms ago) was off, that is, the switch changed from the off state to the on state. The bit corresponding to the switch is “1” in the switch-on buffer.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means (the payout control microcomputer 370) will be described. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the payout control means. As shown in FIG. 51, each phase signal supplied to the payout motor 289 by the stepping motor is output from the output port 0. In addition, a PRDY signal or an EXS signal is output from the output port 0 to the card unit 50, and a game indicating that the gaming machine is in an error state (in this example, a ball-out error state or a full tank error state). A machine error state signal and a prize ball signal 1 indicating that a prize ball payout has been detected are also output. Further, from the output port 1, each segment output signal of the error display LED 374 by 7 segment LED is output. The output port 1 also outputs prize ball information indicating that ten prize ball payouts have been detected.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the payout control means. As shown in FIG. 52, the VL signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal from the card unit 50 are input to bits 0 to 2 of the input port 0, respectively. A connection signal from the main board 31 is input to bit 4 of the input port 0. In addition, the detection signal of the full switch 48, the detection signal of the ball break switch 187, and the detection signal of the payout motor position sensor 295 are input to the bits 5 to 7 of the input port 0, respectively. In addition, the operation signal from the error release switch 375 and the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 are input to the bits 0 and 1 of the input port 1, respectively.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the payout control means. In the main process, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 371 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S701). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S702), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S703).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a built-in device register (step S704). In the process of setting the internal device register in step S704, the payout control CPU 371 sets the CTC. In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, the payout control CPU 371 performs register setting for setting the channel to be used to timer mode, register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and register setting for setting an interrupt vector. The interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. For example, when it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 1 ms, a value corresponding to 1 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register).

  In step S704, the payout control CPU 371 initializes the priority of interrupt processing to be executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 380. In this case, in this case, the payout control CPU 371 initializes the priority of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority order initial setting process (see step S15b) performed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560.

  In step S <b> 704, the payout control CPU 371 sets the serial communication circuit 380. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets the baud rate of the receiving circuit, sets the receiving mode (either 8-bit or 9-bit data format), and sets the parity (the presence or absence of parity, even parity or odd parity). Set). In addition, the control registers of the receiving circuit are initialized and the status registers are initialized. Also, the payout control CPU 371 sets the baud rate of the transmission circuit, sets the transmission mode (either 8-bit or 9-bit data format), and sets the parity (the presence / absence of parity, even parity or odd parity) )I do. Also, each control register of the transmission circuit is initialized.

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least a process of driving the ball payout device 97 in response to a command signal related to award ball payout from the main board, and a ball payout device 97 in response to a ball lending request. A process for driving the program may be included.

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 370. Therefore, an interrupt process based on counting up the built-in CTC can be used. Also, an interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The interrupt based on CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up is an interrupt that occurs when the CPU internal clock (system clock) counts down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S705), and performs a RAM clear process (step S706). In addition, initial values are set in the flags and counters of the RAM area (step S707). Note that the processing in step S707 includes processing for setting the unpaid-off number counter initial value in the unpaid-out number counter. In the process of step S707, the payout control CPU 371 also performs a process of clearing an error flag indicating a detection state of a payout number abnormality error, a full tank error, and a ball breakage error. In this embodiment, when it is determined that there is a payout number error and the payout number error error specification bit is set in the error flag, the payout number error error specification bit is not cleared until the power is reset. Although it does not recover from the number abnormality error, specifically, when the process of step S707 is executed when the power is turned on, the payout number abnormality error designation bit in the error flag is cleared and the payout number abnormality error is recovered.

  The payout control CPU 371 executes serial communication circuit setting processing for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 380 (step S708). In this case, the payout control CPU 371 causes the serial communication circuit 380 to serially communicate with the game control microcomputer 560 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S15a) performed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560. Make settings for Further, as described above, a part of the initial setting of the serial communication circuit 380 is executed in the built-in device register setting process in step S704. Note that all the setting processing of the serial communication circuit 380 may be performed by the serial communication circuit setting processing in step S708.

  Since interruption is prohibited in step S701 of the initial setting process, interruption is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S709). Thereafter, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is entered.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 370 is set so as to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the payout control means. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 executes the following process. First, the payout control CPU 371 performs a switch check process (step S751). In the switch check process, the payout control CPU 371 performs a process of confirming the on / off state of the payout number count switch 301 and the error release switch 375 based on the input of the input port 1. Next, the payout control CPU 371 performs an input determination process (step S752). The input determination process is a process of detecting the state of bits 0 to 7 (see FIG. 52) of the input port 0 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte of the RAM (referred to as a sensor input state flag). The payout control CPU 371 checks the state of the sensor input state flag instead of directly checking the state of the input port when performing control based on the state of bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 50 (step S753). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes main control communication processing for communicating with the game control means of the main board 31 (step S754). Next, the payout control CPU 371 performs control for paying out the lent balls in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 50, and performs control for paying out the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board 31. A payout control process to be executed is executed (step S755).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a payout motor control process (step S756). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S757). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a prepaid card unit error control process for performing error control of the card unit 50 (step S758). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes information output processing for outputting prize ball information to the main board 31 and outputting prize ball signals 1 and gaming machine error status signals to the outside (step S759). Further, display control processing for performing a predetermined display on the error display LED 374 according to the result of the error processing is executed (step S760).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a payout number error error, a full tank error, a ball shortage error, a prepaid card unit unconnected error) are detected in error processing to be described later, an error corresponding to the detected error is detected. Bit is set. Then, in the display control process of step S760, the payout control CPU 371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 374 based on the error bit being set.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the payout control CPU 371 includes an output port 0 buffer and an output port. The contents of the port 1 buffer are output to the output port (step S761: output processing). The output port 0 buffer and the output port 1 buffer include a payout motor control process (step S756), a prepaid card control process (step S753), a main control communication process (step S754), an information output process (step S759), and a display control process ( It is updated in step S760).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the main control communication process of step S754. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) executes a main control command reception process (step S740). Then, the payout control CPU 371 executes one of steps S741 to S744 according to the value of the main control communication control code.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the main control command reception process of step S740 in the main control communication process. In the main control command receiving process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks whether or not a connection signal is input (step S74001). If no connection signal is input, the payout control CPU 101 initializes the transmission circuit and the reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 380 (step S74002). As described above, when the connection signal cannot be received, the transmission circuit and the reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 380 are initialized, so that the command is transmitted even though the connection state with the main board 31 is under an abnormal state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which data is stored in the register or the reception data register. Next, the payout control CPU 371 loads the value of the main control communication control code (step S74003), and checks whether the value of the main control communication control code is a value “0” indicating the main control connection confirmation processing. (Step S74004).

  In this embodiment, in the main control communication process, input of a connection signal from the game control microcomputer 560 is started after power supply to the gaming machine is started, and reception of the first connection confirmation command can be confirmed. The main control connection confirmation process in step S741 is executed. Then, when the reception of the connection confirmation command can be confirmed, the process proceeds to step S742 and subsequent steps, and transmission / reception processing of various payout control commands is executed. Thereafter, if the communication state with the game control microcomputer 560 is maintained normally, one of the processes of steps S742 to S744 is executed, and the main control connection confirmation process of step S741 is basically a game. It will be executed only when the machine is powered on. In step S74004, the fact that the value of the main control communication control code indicates a value other than the main control connection confirmation processing means that after shifting to the processing after step S742, some communication error occurs and the connection signal cannot be input. This is the case. Therefore, if the value of the main control communication control code indicates a value other than the main control connection confirmation process in step S74004, the payout control CPU 371 determines the main control communication error designation bit (game control microcomputer) of the error flag. A bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the communication state with 560) is set (step S74005). The error flag is a flag in which various prize ball errors are set, and is formed in a RAM provided in the payout control microcomputer 370. Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “0” indicating main control connection confirmation processing in the main control communication control code (step S74006). If the value of the main control communication control code is “0” indicating the main control connection confirmation process in step S74004, the process proceeds to step S74006.

  Note that the main control confirmation process in step S741 may be executed exceptionally even after the power is turned on to the gaming machine. Specifically, as described above, after determining that the connection signal is not input in step S74001, if the main control connection confirmation process is not being executed in step S74004, the connection signal is not displayed after the game machine is turned on. It is determined that there is a possibility of being disconnected, and the process returns to the main control connection confirmation process (see step S74006), and again confirms the connection state with the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, a connection confirmation command is issued). Confirm that it can be received (see step S7412). Further, in the main control communication normal processing described later, even if a predetermined period (1050 ms in this example) has elapsed since the connection OK command was transmitted, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are received from the game control microcomputer 560. If not, it is determined that some communication abnormality has occurred, and the process returns to the main control connection confirmation process (see steps S74202 and S74203), and the connection state with the game control microcomputer 560 is confirmed again (specifically, Confirm that the connection confirmation command can be received (see step S7412).

  If the connection signal is input, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the reception error flag is set in the status register of the serial communication circuit 380 (step S74007). For example, if a flag indicating parity error, framing error, noise error, overrun error, or break code detection is set in the status register of the serial communication circuit 380, the payout control CPU 371 receives a reception error of the serial communication circuit 380. It is determined that it is in a state.

  If the reception error flag is set, the payout control CPU 371 initializes the reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 380 (step S74008). As described above, by initializing the reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 380 in the reception error state, the reception data is discarded, and the reception command is stored in the reception data register even though some reception abnormality has occurred. This can prevent the situation. As with the game control microcomputer 560, the payout control CPU 371 clears the contents of the reception data register by reading the data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 380, and discards the reception data. Good. Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets the main control communication error designation bit of the error flag (step S74009).

  Note that when the serial communication circuit 380 of the payout control microcomputer 370 is configured to clear the contents of the reception data register by reading the data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 380, the reception data is read out. If the bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A is not automatically cleared at this time, the payout control microcomputer 370 reads the received data from the received data register every time the received data is read out. It is necessary to perform processing for clearing bit 5 (RDRF) of A. Further, when the reception data register is not configured to be automatically cleared, the payout control microcomputer 370 clears the contents of the reception data register every time the reception data is read from the reception data register. There is a need.

  For example, the serial communication circuit 380 may clear the contents of the received data register and bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A based on reading the received data from the received data register. . In this case, for example, based on the fact that the interrupt control circuit of the serial communication circuit 380 detects that the received data has been read from the received data register, the contents of the received data register and bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A May be cleared.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a connection confirmation command at intervals of 10 seconds even when the connection OK command cannot be received. Even if neither the winning ball number acceptance command nor the winning ball preparation command is received in response to the transmission of the winning ball number command, the connection OK command is subsequently received in response to the transmission of the connection confirmation command. If possible, the control to retransmit the prize ball number command is performed again. Accordingly, when the error state of the serial communication circuit 380 is released, the connection confirmation command can be received again, and the missed prize ball number command is also retransmitted. Therefore, even if the received data is discarded in step S74008, the game Communication between the control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is not delayed, and there is no shortage of prize balls.

  If the reception error flag is not set, the payout control CPU 371 loads the contents of the reception buffer (step S74010) and checks whether or not a connection confirmation command is received (step S74011). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the content of the loaded reception buffer is “A0 (H)” (see FIG. 24). If the connection confirmation command has been received, the payout control CPU 371 proceeds to step S74014.

  If a connection confirmation command has not been received, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a prize ball number command has been received. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the contents of the connection number command should be at least “51 (H)” and less than “60 (H)”. Accordingly, the payout control CPU 371 first checks whether or not the content of the loaded reception buffer is equal to or greater than the minimum prize ball number command value “51 (H)” (step S74012). Next, if the prize ball number command minimum judgment value is “51 (H)” or more, the payout control CPU 371 determines whether the content of the loaded reception buffer is less than the prize ball number command maximum judgment value “60 (H)”. It is confirmed whether or not (step S74013). If it is less than the winning ball number command maximum determination value “60 (H)”, the payout control CPU 371 determines that a winning ball number command has been received, and proceeds to step S74014.

  In step S74014, the payout control CPU 371 stores the contents of the reception buffer (connection confirmation command, prize ball number command) in the main control communication reception buffer. The main control communication reception buffer is composed of 1 byte and can store only one reception command at a time. Even with this configuration, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt period (1 ms in this example) in the payout control microcomputer 370 is equal to the timer interrupt period (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560). 4 ms), a situation in which a plurality of payout control commands are received within one timer interrupt does not occur, and there is no inconvenience. In addition, even if the award ball number command is received before receiving the first connection confirmation command due to erroneous processing after turning on the power to the gaming machine, the connection confirmation command is subsequently issued. If it is received, it is overwritten and stored in the main control communication reception buffer. Therefore, there is a situation in which the connection confirmation command cannot be confirmed at all in the main control connection confirmation process (step S741) described later, and it becomes impossible to shift to the main control communication normal process. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a main control connection confirmation process (step S741) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 0. In the main control connection confirmation process, the payout control CPU 371 loads the contents of the main control communication reception buffer (step S7411), and confirms whether or not a connection confirmation command is received (step S7412). If a connection confirmation command has been received, the payout control CPU 371 sets a connection OK command (step S7413) and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S7414). In the main control transmission command conversion process in step S7414, a process of setting a control state (an error state such as a payout number error error, a ball out error, a full tank error, a prize ball error) in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command is performed. Done. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S7415). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a connection OK command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380. In this embodiment, an expression such as output to a register may be used. More specifically, a process of writing a command or data to the register is performed. For example, in step S7415, the payout control CPU 371 performs a process of writing a connection command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380. This applies to other similar descriptions in this embodiment as well.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when transmitting the connection OK command in step S7415. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the main control communication normal process in the main control communication control code (step S7416). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1050 ms in this example) to the main control communication control timer (step S7417).

  58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the main control communication normal process (step S742) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 1. In the main control communication normal process, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S74201), and checks whether the main control communication control timer has timed out (step S74202).

  In this embodiment, as described above, every time one second elapses after the connection OK command is received from the payout control microcomputer 370, the next connection confirmation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. Therefore, if the main control communication control timer has timed out in step S74202, it means that the next connection confirmation command is issued even if 1050 ms (see steps S7417 and S74209) elapses more than 1 second after the transmission of the connection OK command. This is a case where reception was not possible. Therefore, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “0” indicating the main control connection confirmation process in the main control communication control code (step S74203), returns to the main control connection confirmation process, and controls to wait for the recovery of the communication state. To do.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer if the main control communication control timer has timed out in step S74202. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  If the main control communication control timer has not timed out, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer (step S74204). If a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the received command is a connection confirmation command (step S74205). If a connection confirmation command has been received, the payout control CPU 371 sets a connection OK command (step S74206) and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74207). In the main control transmission command conversion process in step S74207, a process for setting a control state (an error state such as a payout number error error, a ball out error, a full tank error, a prize ball error) in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command is performed. Done. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74208). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a connection OK command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when the connection OK command is transmitted in step S74208. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1050 ms in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74209).

  If the command received in step S74205 is not a connection confirmation command, it means that a prize ball number command has been received. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the error flag is 0 (step S74210). If the value of the error flag is not 0 (that is, if it is an error state and any error bit is set), the process proceeds to step S74219. If the value of the error flag is 0 (that is, if no error state is set and no error bit is set), the payout control CPU 371 checks whether a BRDY signal is input. (Step S74211). If the BRDY signal is input, the process proceeds to step S74219.

  If the BRDY signal is not input, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag indicating the payout control state (step S74212), and confirms whether the winning ball payout operation or the ball lending payout operation is in progress. (Step S74213). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 specifies a prize ball payout operation designation bit (bit indicating that a prize ball payout operation is in progress) or a ball lending payout operation designation bit (in a ball lending payout operation) in the payout control state flag. It is confirmed whether or not a bit indicating that is set. If the winning ball payout operation or the ball lending payout operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S74219. In this embodiment, since the next prize ball number command is transmitted after the prize ball payout operation is finished and the prize ball end command is received, the step is performed unless an abnormality such as a communication error occurs. In S74213, it is not determined that the prize ball payout operation is in progress.

  If neither the winning ball payout operation nor the ball lending payout operation is in progress, the winning ball payout operation based on the received winning ball number command can be started immediately. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets the lower 4 bits of the main control communication reception buffer (that is, the number of winning balls set in the winning ball number command) in the unpaid-out number counter (step S74214). The unpaid-out number counter is a counter for counting the number of unpaid out prize balls and rental balls.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit a prize ball number acceptance command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74215). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a prize ball number acceptance command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when it transmits a prize ball number acceptance command in step S74215. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “3” indicating the main control communication end process in the main control communication control code (step S74216). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1 second in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74218). It should be noted that if a prize ball payout operation is not completed after one second has elapsed after the prize ball number acceptance command is transmitted based on the value set in step S74218, a prize ball preparation command is transmitted.

  In step S74219, the payout control CPU 371 stores the lower 4 bits of the main control communication reception buffer (that is, the number of prize balls set with the prize ball number command) in the main control communication prize ball number buffer. That is, in this case, an error state has occurred, or during the winning ball payout operation, the ball lending payout operation, or during the ball lending preparation, the winning ball payout operation based on the received winning ball number command is immediately performed. Can't start. Therefore, the payout control CPU 371 suspends the reply of the prize ball number acceptance command and temporarily saves the prize ball number set in the prize ball number command in the main control communication prize ball number buffer.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a command for preparing a prize ball (step S74220), and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74221). In the main control transmission command conversion process in step S74221, a control state (error state such as a payout number error error, a ball runout error, a full tank error, a prize ball error, etc.) is set in the lower 4 bits of the command for preparing a prize ball. Processing is performed. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted prize ball preparing command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74222). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a prize ball preparing command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  Note that the payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when the award ball preparing command is transmitted in step S74222. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “2” indicating the main control communication process to the main control communication control code (step S74223). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1 second in this example) to the main control communication control timer (step S74224). It should be noted that, after the command for preparing a prize ball is transmitted based on the value set in step S74224, the command for preparing the next prize ball is transmitted if it is not ready to start the prize ball payout operation after one second has elapsed. Will be.

  60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the main control communication in-process (step S743) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 2. In the main control communication process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer (step S74301). If a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the received command is a connection confirmation command (step S 74302). If it is not a connection confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S74306. If a connection confirmation command has been received, the payout control CPU 371 sets a connection OK command (step S74303) and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74304). In the main control transmission command conversion process in step S74304, a process of setting a control state (an error state such as a payout number error error, a ball out error, a full tank error, a prize ball error, etc.) in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command. Done. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74305). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a connection OK command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380. Then, the process proceeds to step S74306.

  In step S74306, the payout control CPU 371 sets a main control communication error designation bit in the error flag. That is, the main control communication process is a process that is executed after receiving the prize ball number command until the prize ball payout operation can be started based on the received prize ball number command. Since the response of the command is suspended, the game control microcomputer 560 is in a waiting state for receiving the award ball number reception command. During this time, a new payout control command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. There is no trap. Nevertheless, since receiving a new command can determine that some abnormality has occurred in the communication state, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for setting a main control communication error designation bit.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when the main control communication error designation bit is set in step S74306. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the main control communication normal process in the main control communication control code (step S74307). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1050 ms in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74308).

  If there is no reception command in the main control communication reception buffer, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S74309), and checks whether the main control communication control timer has timed out (step S74309). S74310).

  If the main control communication control timer has timed out (Y in step S74310), it means that one second or more has elapsed since the previous prize ball preparation command was transmitted. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets a winning ball preparing command in order to transmit the next winning ball preparing command (step S74311), and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74312). In the main control transmission command conversion process of step S74312, the control state (error status such as a payout number error error, a ball outage error, a full tank error, a prize ball error, etc.) is set in the lower 4 bits of the command for preparing a prize ball. Processing is performed. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted prize ball preparing command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74313). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a prize ball preparing command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1 second in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74314). It should be noted that, after the command for preparing a prize ball is transmitted based on the value set in step S74314, the command for preparing the next prize ball is not yet ready if the prize ball payout operation cannot be started after one second has passed. Will be sent.

  If the main control communication control timer has not timed out, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the error flag is 0 (step S74315). If the value of the error flag is not 0 (that is, if it is in an error state and one of the error bits is set), the winning ball payout operation cannot be started yet, so the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the error flag is 0 (that is, if no error state is set and no error bit is set), the payout control CPU 371 checks whether a BRDY signal is input. (Step S74316). If the BRDY signal is input, the winning ball payout operation cannot be started yet, and the process is terminated as it is.

  If the BRDY signal is not input, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag indicating the payout control state (step S74317), and confirms whether the winning ball payout operation or the ball lending payout operation is in progress. (Step S74318). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 specifies a prize ball payout operation designation bit (bit indicating that a prize ball payout operation is in progress) or a ball lending payout operation designation bit (in a ball lending payout operation) in the payout control state flag. It is confirmed whether or not a bit indicating that is set. If the winning ball payout operation or the ball lending payout operation is in progress, the winning ball payout operation cannot be started yet, so the processing is ended as it is. In this embodiment, since the next prize ball number command is transmitted after the prize ball payout operation is finished and the prize ball end command is received, the step is performed unless an abnormality such as a communication error occurs. In S74318, it is not determined that a prize ball payout operation is in progress.

  If neither the winning ball payout operation nor the ball lending payout operation is in progress, it means that the winning ball payout operation based on the received winning ball number command can be started. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets the lower 4 bits of the main control communication prize ball number buffer (that is, the temporarily saved prize ball number) in the unpaid number counter (step S74319).

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the winning ball payout operation cannot be started immediately when the winning ball number command is received, the winning ball number specified by the winning ball number command is immediately set to the unpaid number. Instead of being set in the counter, it is temporarily saved in the main control communication award ball number buffer, but this control is performed, for example, by adding the award ball number to the unpaid number counter during the lending ball payout operation. This is to prevent inconvenience in processing related to payout control, such as preventing a situation where the number of winning balls cannot be accurately managed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit a prize ball number acceptance command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74320). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a prize ball number acceptance command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “3” indicating the main control communication end process in the main control communication control code (step S74321). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1 second in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74322). It should be noted that if a prize ball payout operation is not completed after a lapse of one second after the prize ball number acceptance command is transmitted based on the value set in step S74322, a prize ball preparing command is transmitted.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a main control communication end process (step S744) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 3. In the main control communication end process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer (step S74401). If a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the received command is a connection confirmation command (step S74402). If it is not a connection confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S74406. If a connection confirmation command has been received, the payout control CPU 371 sets a connection OK command (step S74403) and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74404). In the main control transmission command conversion process of step S74404, a process of setting a control state (an error state such as a payout number error error, a ball out error, a full tank error, a prize ball error) in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command is performed. Done. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74405). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a connection OK command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380. Then, control goes to a step S74406.

  In step S74406, the payout control CPU 371 sets a main control communication error designation bit in the error flag. That is, the main control communication end process is a process executed after receiving the prize ball number command and starting the prize ball payout operation until the prize ball payout operation based on the received prize ball number command is ended. Since the microcomputer for use 560 is in a waiting state for receiving the winning ball end command, it is unlikely that a new payout control command will be received from the game control microcomputer 560 during this period. Nevertheless, since receiving a new command can determine that some abnormality has occurred in the communication state, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for setting a main control communication error designation bit.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when the main control communication error designation bit is set in step S74406. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the main control communication normal process in the main control communication control code (step S74407). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1050 ms in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74408).

  If there is no reception command in the main control communication reception buffer, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S74409), and checks whether the main control communication control timer has timed out (step S74409). S74410).

  If the main control communication control timer has timed out (Y in step S74410), it means that one second or more has elapsed since the last time a prize ball acceptance command or a prize ball preparation command was transmitted. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets a prize ball preparing command in order to transmit the next prize ball preparing command (step S74411), and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74412). In the main control transmission command conversion process in step S74412, a control state (error state such as a payout number error error, a ball runout error, a full tank error, a prize ball error, etc.) is set in the lower 4 bits of the command for preparing a prize ball. Processing is performed. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted prize ball preparing command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74413). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a prize ball preparing command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1 second in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74414). It should be noted that, based on the value set in step S74414, after the command for preparing a prize ball is transmitted, if the prize ball payout operation is not yet completed after another one second, the next command for preparing a prize ball is transmitted. It will be.

  If the main control communication control timer has not timed out, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag (step S74415), and checks whether or not a prize ball payout operation is in progress (step S74416). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a prize ball payout operation specifying bit is set in the payout control state flag. If the winning ball payout operation is in progress, it means that the winning ball payout operation based on the received winning ball number command has not been finished yet, and the payout control CPU 371 ends the process as it is. If no winning ball payout operation is in progress, it means that the winning ball payout operation based on the received winning ball number command has ended. Therefore, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit a prize ball end command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74417). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs a process of outputting a prize ball end command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when it transmits the winning ball end command in step S74417. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the main control communication normal process in the main control communication control code (step S74418). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1050 ms in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74419).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing main control transmission command conversion processing executed in steps S7414, S74207, S74221, S74304, S74312, S74404, and S74412. In the main control transmission command conversion process, the payout control CPU 371 first loads an error flag and checks whether or not the payout number abnormality error designation bit is set (step S731). If the payout number abnormality error designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 sets a main control communication payout number error error output bit (specifically, bit 3) in the conversion buffer (step S732).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the ball break error designation bit is set (step S733). If the ball-out error designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 sets the main control communication ball-out output bit (specifically bit 2) in the conversion buffer (step S734).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the full error designation bit is set (step S735). If the full error specification bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 sets the full output bit for main control communication (specifically bit 1) of the conversion buffer (step S736).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not other prize ball error designation bits are set (step S737). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 includes a main control communication error designation bit, a main control unconnected error designation bit, a withdrawal switch abnormality detection error 1 designation bit, a withdrawal switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, a withdrawal in the error flag. Check if the case error specification bit is set. If any other prize ball error designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 sets a main control communication ball out output bit (specifically bit 0) in the conversion buffer (step S738).

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets the contents of the conversion buffer in the payout control command (connection OK command or prize ball preparing command) set for transmission (step S739).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the payout control process in step S755. In the payout control process, the payout control CPU 371 confirms that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on (step S7501), and checks whether the value of the unpaid number counter is 0. (Step S7502). If the value of the unpaid number counter is 0, the payout control CPU 371 adds 1 to the value of the payout number abnormality counter for counting the cumulative number of abnormal payouts (step S7503). In other words, Y in step S7502 means that the unpaid number to be paid out is not set in the unpaid-out number counter, so that the payout operation is performed even though the game ball should not be paid out. And the payout count switch 301 detects the payout of the game ball. For this reason, there is a possibility that the payout operation has been performed by some kind of fraud, so the payout control CPU 101 cumulatively adds 1 to the value of the payout number abnormality counter.

  The payout number abnormality counter indicates the number of payouts exceeding the number of unpaid game balls to be paid out and the number of payout shortages that did not meet the number of unpaid game balls to be paid out. This is a counter for cumulatively counting. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when the value of the payout number abnormality counter becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (2000 in this example), it is determined that a payout number error has occurred and the payout is stopped. Processing to control the state is performed. Note that the process of step S7503 corresponds to a process of cumulatively counting the excess payout in the payout number abnormality counter.

  In this embodiment, without distinguishing whether the ball is a winning ball or a lending ball, the payout excess number and the payout shortage number are cumulatively counted in the payout number abnormality counter. For only one of the rented balls, the excessive payout and the shortage payout may be cumulatively counted in the payout number abnormality counter. Further, for example, with respect to prize balls and lending balls, it is possible to cumulatively count the excess payout and the shortage payout using separate counters. In this case, it may be determined that a payout number error occurs when the value of one of the counters reaches a predetermined threshold value, or a payout number error error when the total value of both counters reaches a predetermined threshold value. May be determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the number of payouts and the number of payouts are counted cumulatively by adding the value of the payout number abnormality counter is shown. The way of counting up is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, conversely, an excessive payout number and an insufficient payout number may be counted cumulatively by subtracting the value of the payout number abnormality counter. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 371 sets “2000” as an initial value in the payout number abnormality counter in the initial setting process at the time of power-on. It may be determined that a payout number abnormality error has occurred based on determining that the value of has reached 0.

  Further, for example, the payout excess number may be subtracted from the value of the payout number abnormality counter, and the insufficient payout number may be added to the value of the payout number abnormality counter. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 371 sets “2000” as the initial value in the payout number abnormality counter in the initial setting process when the power is turned on, and subtracts 1 from the value of the payout number abnormality counter in step S7503. In steps S75320, S75325, and S75335, which will be described later, a value corresponding to the insufficient payout number may be added to the value of the payout number abnormality counter. For example, in the processing of steps S7504, S75321, and S7725 described later, it may be determined that a payout number error has occurred based on the value of the payout number error counter being 2000 or less.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the added payout number abnormality counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000) (step S7504). If it is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000), the payout control CPU 371 determines that a payout number error error has occurred, and indicates a payout number error error indicating that a payout number error error has occurred. A flag is set (step S7505). That is, in this embodiment, the number of abnormal payouts detected is cumulatively managed on the payout control microcomputer 370 side, and if the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number abnormal error determination value (for example, 2000), It is determined that there is an extremely high possibility that a payout operation is being performed due to some sort of fraud, and it is determined that a payout number abnormality error (an error indicating that the number of game balls paid out is abnormal) has occurred. In addition, there are not a few cases where game balls are paid out excessively or insufficient due to malfunctions, etc., so when an abnormality in the number of payouts is detected, it is immediately determined as a payout number error. The frequency determined to be a payout number abnormality error becomes higher than necessary, and the game is hindered. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of abnormal payouts detected is cumulatively managed, and the payout number abnormality error is determined on the condition that the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value (for example, 2000). By determining, it is prevented that it is determined that the payout number abnormality error is more than necessary.

  In this embodiment, if it is determined that there is a payout number error and the payout number error error flag is set once, the payout number error error flag is not cleared until the power is reset, and the payout number error error is not recovered. When the payout number abnormality error flag is set, the processes of steps S7504, S7505 and the processes of S75321, S75322, S7725, S7726 described later may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent useless processing after it is once determined that the payout number abnormality error has occurred, and to reduce the processing burden.

  Further, in this embodiment, “2000” corresponding to the number of game balls that can be stored in a game ball storage box (so-called dollar box) generally used in a game store is set as a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value. Although the case where it uses is shown, other values (for example, 1000 or 3000) may be used as the predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value.

  In this embodiment, the payout control process shown in FIG. 64 is a process that is commonly executed when the prize ball payout operation is executed and when the lending ball payout operation is executed. This counter is used in common when counting the number of game balls that have not been paid out with prize balls and when counting the number of game balls that have not been paid out with lending balls. When an abnormality in the number of payouts is detected, the value of the payout number abnormality counter is incremented without distinguishing between payout with a prize ball and payout with a lending ball, and whether or not a payout number abnormality error has occurred. A determination is made.

  If the value of the unpaid-out number counter is not 0, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the unpaid-out number counter (step S7506), and a payout ball detection designation bit (game ball payout) is added to the flag of the payout control state. A bit indicating detection) is set (step S7507). The payout ball detection designation bit is a bit that is set when the payout number count switch 301 is turned on, and indicates that the payout number count switch 301 has detected at least one game ball during the payout operation. is there.

  Thereafter, the payout control CPU 371 executes any one of steps S7511 to S7513 according to the value of the payout control code.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a payout start waiting process (step S7511) executed when the payout control code is 0. In the payout start waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks whether or not the value of the error flag is 0 (step S75101). If an error bit (one or more of all error bits in the error flag) is set, the payout control CPU 371 controls not to execute the subsequent processing. In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S75101, it is determined that there is a payout number abnormal error, and the payout number abnormal error designation bit of the error bit is set, so that the steps after step S75102 are set. Control is performed so as not to shift to processing, and the payout is stopped.

  If the value of the error flag is 0, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the BRDY signal is input (step S75102). If the BRDY signal is input, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag (step S75103), and checks whether or not a ball lending request is being made (step S75104). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a ball lending request specifying bit (a bit indicating that a ball lending request is being made) is set in the payout control state flag. The payout control CPU 371 may determine whether or not a ball lending request is being made by confirming whether or not a BRQ signal is input. If a ball lending request is being made (that is, when a ball lending payout operation is started), the payout control CPU 371 resets the ball lending request specifying bit in the payout control state flag (step S75105) and at the same time a payout control state flag. The designated bit during the ball lending / dispensing operation is set (step S75016). Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined ball lending number (25 in this example) in the unpaid number counter (step S75107) and a predetermined ball lending number (25 in this example) in the payout motor rotation number buffer. Is set (step S75108). Then, control goes to a step S75113.

  The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S756). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer.

  If the BRDY signal is not input, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the unpaid-out number counter is 0 (step S75109). If the value of the unpaid number counter is not 0 (that is, when the prize ball payout operation is started), the payout control CPU 371 sets the value of the unpaid number counter in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S75110). That is, in this case, since the number of prize balls designated by the received prize ball number command should be set in the unpaid quantity counter (see steps S74214 and S74319), the prize ball dispensing operation is started. Then, a process of setting the number of prize balls in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer is performed. Next, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag (step S75111), and sets a prize ball paying-out operation designation bit in the payout control state flag (step S75112). Then, control goes to a step S75113.

  In step S75113, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value in the payout motor control code for selecting a process to be executed in the payout motor control process according to the payout motor activation process. Thereby, in the payout motor control process in step S756, a payout motor starting process for starting the payout motor 289 is executed, and a lending ball payout operation or a prize ball payout operation is started. Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the payout motor stop waiting process in the payout control code (step S75114), and ends the process.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a payout motor stop waiting process (step S7512) executed when the payout control code is 1. In the payout motor stop waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 first loads a payout control state flag (step S7521), and checks whether or not the payout operation is completed (step S7522). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a payout operation end designation bit (a bit indicating that the payout operation has ended) is set in the payout control state flag. The payout operation end designation bit is set in the payout motor brake process and the payout motor ball biting release process in the payout motor control process in step S756 shown in FIG.

  In the payout motor control processing, the payout control CPU 371 performs payout motor normal processing (processing such as setting the pointer at the head address of the table stored in the ROM), payout, according to the value of the payout motor control code. Motor start-up processing (processing such as setting the initial value of the excitation pattern in bits 4 to 7 of the port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0), payout motor slow-up processing (starting the rotation of the payout motor 289 smoothly) Therefore, the output state of the output port 0 is read out by reading the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at intervals longer than those in the case of constant speed processing and gradually approaching the time intervals in the case of constant speed processing. , Processing of setting bits 4 to 7 in the port 0 buffer corresponding to), payout motor constant speed processing (periodic payout motor excitation pattern) The process of reading the contents of the table and setting the bits 4 to 7 of the port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0), the dispensing motor brake process (the constant speed process to smoothly stop the dispensing motor 289) Port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0 by reading out the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at intervals longer than those in the case of, and gradually away from the time interval in the case of constant speed processing Processing of setting the bits 4 to 7), the payout motor ball biting process (when the ball biting state is detected, in order to release the ball biting, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table are read and the output port 0 is set. Processing to set bits 4 to 7 in the port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state), and the payout motor ball biting release processing (ball biting state is released) Either processing shifts to the payout motor normal processing process returns to the normal motor control state) execution.

  If the payout operation has been completed, the payout control CPU 371 resets the payout operation end designation bit of the payout control state flag (step S7523) and stops the payout motor used for setting a payout passage monitoring time to be described later. The waiting process setting table 2 is set (step S7524).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout ball number inspected designation bit is set in the payout control state flag (step S7525). The designated number of paid-out balls inspected is a bit indicating that the detection of the number-of-payout count switch 301 has been determined at the end of the payout operation by the payout motor 289 (at the end of normal operation). If the payout ball number inspected designation bit is set, the process proceeds to step S7527. If the payout ball number inspected designation bit is not set, the payout control CPU 371 sets a payout motor stop waiting process setting table (step S7526). That is, the payout control CPU 371 replaces the table set in step S7524 with a payout motor stop waiting process setting table. Then, control goes to a step S7527.

  In step S7527, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “2” indicating payout passing waiting processing in the payout control code. The payout control CPU 371 sets the payout passing monitoring time in the payout control timer based on the table set in steps S7524 and S7526 (step S7527). The payout passing monitoring time is a time that has a margin in the time from when the last payout ball is paid out by the payout motor 289 until it passes through the payout number count switch 301. In this embodiment, when the payout ball number inspected bit is set in step S7525, 1 second is set as the payout passing monitoring time based on the payout motor stop waiting process setting table 2 set in step S7524. To do. If the paid ball number inspected bit is not set in step S7525, 0.6 seconds is set as the payout passing monitoring time based on the payout motor stop waiting process setting table replaced in step S7526.

  67 to 69 are flowcharts showing a payout passing waiting process (step S7513) executed when the value of the payout control code is 2. In the payout passing waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks the value of the payout control timer (step S75301). If the value is 0, the process proceeds to step S75304. If the value of the payout control timer is not 0, the value of the payout control timer is decremented by 1 (step S75302). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0 (step S75303), that is, if the payout control timer has not timed out, the process is terminated.

  If the payout control timer has timed out, the payout control CPU 371 loads the error flag, and sets the payout number abnormality error designation bit, the dispensing switch abnormality detection error 1 designation bit, or the dispensing switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit. It is confirmed whether or not (step S75304). If any one of the payout number abnormality error designation bit, the dispensing switch abnormality detection error 1 designation bit, or the dispensing switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit is set, it is determined that the dispensing operation cannot be continued any more, and the process proceeds to step S75306. Transition. If none of the payout number error error specification bit, the payout switch error detection error 1 specification bit, and the payout switch error detection error 2 specification bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 sets the value of the unpaid number counter to 0. It is confirmed whether or not (step S75305). If the value of the unpaid-out counter is 0, the payout control CPU 371 assumes that the payout operation has ended normally, loads a payout control state flag (step S75306), and is requesting a ballot for the payout control state flag. Bits other than the designated bit and the payout operation end designation bit are reset (step S75307). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “0” indicating a payout start waiting process in the payout control code (step S75308), and ends the process.

  If the value of the unpaid-out number counter is not 0, the payout control CPU 371 loads an error flag and confirms whether or not the ball breakage error designation bit or the full tank error designation bit is set (step S75309). . If the ball breakage error designation bit or the full tank error designation bit is set, the processing is terminated as it is. If neither the ball breakage error designation bit nor the full tank error designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout case error designation bit is set in the error flag (step S75310). If the payout case error designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 loads the payout control status flag (step S75311), and sets the payout ball number checked designation bit in the payout control status flag (step S75312). . The payout control CPU 371 also includes a 1 designation bit during re-payout operation (bit indicating execution of the first re-payout operation) and a 2 designation bit during re-payout operation (execution of the second re-payout operation). Is reset (step S75313), and the process ends.

  Note that the designated number of paid-out balls has been inspected is a bit indicating that the detection of the number-of-payout count switch 301 has been determined at the end of the payout operation by the payout motor 289 (at the end of normal operation). Note that, when the value of the unpaid-out number counter remains two or more despite the end of the payout operation, the remaining number is added to the payout number abnormality counter. Further, the detection determination by the payout number count switch 301 at the end of the payout operation is executed only once every time the payout operation is executed, and the payout motor ball biting process or the payout motor ball bite releasing process is executed. It is not executed when the biting operation is finished (specifically, since the payout case error designation bit is set in the ball biting state, the ball biting operation is performed by setting the payout ball number checked designation bit in advance in step S75312. Even if the operation is finished, the detection by the payout number count switch 301 is not determined). It should be noted that the payout ball number inspected designation bit is also set when the payout motor constant speed process in the payout motor control process becomes full.

  If the payout case error designation bit is not set in step S75310, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag (step S75314) and performs processing for executing re-payout processing after step S75315.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control CPU 371 first checks whether or not the 2 designation bit during re-payout operation of the payout control state flag is set (step S75315). If it is not set, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the 1 designation bit during re-payout operation of the payout control state flag is set (step S75316). If the 1 designation bit during re-payout operation is not set, the payout control CPU 371 sets the 1 designation bit during re-payout operation in the payout control state flag in order to execute the first re-payout operation (step S75317). .

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout ball number inspected designation bit is set in the payout control state flag (step S75318). If the specified number of paid-out balls is inspected, the process proceeds to step S75326. If the specified number of paid-out balls has been inspected, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the unpaid-out number counter is 2 or more (step S75319). If the value of the unpaid-out number counter is not 2 or more, the process proceeds to step S75326. If the value of the unpaid number counter is 2 or more, the payout control CPU 371 adds the value of the unpaid number counter to the payout number abnormality counter (step S75320). Note that the process of step S75320 corresponds to a process of cumulatively counting the number of shortage payouts in the payout number abnormality counter. Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the added payout number abnormality counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000) (step S75321). If it is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000), the payout control CPU 371 determines that a payout number error error has occurred, and indicates a payout number error error indicating that a payout number error error has occurred. A flag is set (step S75322).

  In this embodiment, the payout is performed on condition that the value of the unpaid-out number counter remains at a predetermined reference number (2 in this example) even though the payout operation is finished by the process of step S75319. The value of the unpaid-out number counter is added to the number abnormality counter. That is, since the payout operation is terminated due to a malfunction or the like, the value of the unpaid-out number counter remains in a small number (1 in this example). If even one unsettled number counter value remains, the accumulated number is immediately counted as a cumulative number in the payout number abnormality counter, and the frequency determined as a payout number abnormality error is increased more than necessary, causing problems to the game. End up. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the condition that the value of the unpaid-out number counter remains 2 or more with a little allowance, the accumulated number is counted in the payout number abnormality counter, and it is determined that the payout number error is more than necessary. Is prevented. The process of step S75319 shows a case where the payout number abnormality counter is cumulatively counted up on condition that the payout shortage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (2 in this example). Alternatively, the payout number abnormality counter may be counted up cumulatively on condition that the number is a predetermined reference number (2 in this example) or more. In this case, for example, on the condition that the number of times determined to be Y in step S7502 shown in FIG. Count up. In the processing of steps S75319 and S75320, the value of the unpaid number counter is always used as it is in the payout number abnormality counter regardless of whether or not the value of the unpaid number counter remains at a predetermined reference number (2 in this example). You may make it add.

  If the 1 designation bit during re-payout operation is set in step S75316, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the dispensed ball detection designation bit is set in the payout control state flag (step S75323). If the payout ball detection designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 proceeds to step S75326. If the payout ball detection designation bit is not set, the payout control CPU 371 sets the 2 designation bit during re-payout operation in the payout control state flag to execute the second re-payout operation (step S75324). Then, 1 is added to the value of the payout number abnormality counter (step S75325). Note that the process of step S75325 corresponds to a process of cumulatively counting the number of shortage payouts in the payout number abnormality counter. Then, control goes to a step S75326. Note that by executing the processing of step S75325, the value of the payout number abnormality counter is incremented by 1 when the re-payout operation is not performed normally despite the execution of the first re-payout operation. The Even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the unpaid-out number counter may not be 0 due to an erroneous count or the like. Therefore, if the payout ball detection designation bit is set by executing the process of step S75323, that is, if the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of at least one game ball during the payout operation. Since there is a possibility that the payout has been completed normally, the process proceeds to step S75326 without performing the cumulative count of the payout number abnormality counter.

  In step S75326, the payout control CPU 371 sets 1 as the number of repaid operations in order to execute the first repaid operation. Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets the number of re-payout operations (1 in this example) in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer (step S75327). Next, the payout control CPU 371 loads the payout control state flag (step S75328), and resets the payout ball detection designation bit of the payout control state flag (step 75329).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value in the payout motor control code for selecting a process executed in the payout motor control process in accordance with the payout motor activation process (step S75330). Thereby, in the payout motor control process of step S756, the payout motor starting process for starting the payout motor 289 is executed, and the re-payout operation is started. Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the payout motor stop waiting process in the payout control code (step S75331), and ends the process.

  If the 2 designation bit during re-payout operation is set in step S75315, the payout control CPU 371 resets the 2 designation bit during re-payout operation of the payout control state flag (step S75332). Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout ball detection designation bit of the payout control state flag is set (step S75333). If the payout ball detection designation bit is set, the process proceeds to step S75326. If the payout ball detection designation bit is not set, the payout control CPU 371 resets the 2 designation bit during re-payout operation of the payout control state flag (step S75334) and adds 1 to the value of the payout number abnormality counter (step S75334). Step S75335). Note that the process of step S75335 corresponds to a process of cumulatively counting the number of shortage payouts in the payout number abnormality counter. Also, by executing the process of step S75335, even if the second re-payout operation is executed, if the re-payout operation is not performed normally, the value of the payout number abnormality counter is incremented by one. Even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the unpaid-out number counter may not be 0 due to an erroneous count or the like. Therefore, if the payout ball detection designation bit is set by executing the process of step S75333, that is, if the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of at least one game ball during the payout operation. Since there is a possibility that the payout has been completed normally, the process proceeds to step S75326 without performing the cumulative count of the payout number abnormality counter.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 loads an error flag, and sets a payout case error designation bit in the error flag (step S75336). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes) in the re-payout waiting timer (step S75337) and ends the process. The re-payout waiting timer set in step S57337 is measured by error processing described later (see step S7710), and the payout case error designation bit in the error flag is reset based on the time-out of the re-payout timer. (See steps S7711 and S7712). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, after the payout case error is detected, the error state is automatically recovered based on the fact that two minutes have passed.

  Next, error processing will be described. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the type of error and the display of the LED 374 for error display. As shown in FIG. 70, when no error has occurred, “−” is displayed on the error display LED 374. When the cumulative count value of the payout number abnormality counter becomes 2000 or more and a payout number error is detected, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 displays an error display LED 374 as a payout number error. Control to display “A” on the screen. If a payout number abnormality error occurs, the error state is continued until the power supply of the gaming machine is reset.

  When the connection signal from the main board 31 is turned off, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 performs control to display “1” on the error display LED 374 as a main board non-connection error. Do.

  When the disconnection of the payout count switch 301 or a ball clogging occurs at the payout count switch 301, the error display LED 374 is controlled to display “2” as the payout switch abnormality detection error 1. The disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or the occurrence of ball clogging in the payout number count switch 301 is determined by the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 not being turned off.

  When the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on even though the game ball is not paying out, a control for displaying “3” on the error display LED 374 as a payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is performed. Do. If the detection signal of the payout count switch 301 does not turn on despite the rotation abnormality of the payout motor 289 or the game ball being paid out, “4” is displayed on the error display LED 374 as a payout case error. Control. The specific method for detecting that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is not turned on is as described above.

  When a serial communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected, control is performed to display “5” on the error display LED 374 as a main control communication error. .

  In addition, when the lower pan is full, that is, when the full switch 48 is turned on, control is performed to display “6” on the error display LED 374 as a full error. When the supply ball is insufficient, that is, when the ball break switch 187 is turned on, control is performed to display “7” on the error display LED 374 as a ball break error.

  Further, when the VL signal from the card unit 50 is turned off, control is performed to display “8” on the error display LED 374 as a prepaid card unit non-connection error. When communication with the card unit 50 is performed at an improper timing, control is performed to display “9” on the error display LED 374 as a prepaid card unit communication error. The prepaid card unit communication error is detected in the prepaid card unit control process (step S758).

  Among the above errors, after a payout switch abnormality detection error 2, a payout case error, or a main control communication error occurs, the error release switch 375 is operated and an operation signal is output from the error release switch 375 (becomes ON state) The payout control means returns to the state before the error occurred.

  As already described, the payout control CPU 371 specifically displays an error on the error display LED 374 according to the relationship shown in FIG. 70 in the display control process of the timer interrupt process (see step S760). For example, the payout control CPU 371 generates a prepaid card unit unconnected error in the display control process based on the setting of the prepaid card unit unconnected state designation bit in the error process described later (see step S7729). An error display “8” indicating that is displayed on the error display LED 374 is controlled. Further, for example, based on the fact that the full error specification bit is set in the error processing (see step S7714), an error display “6” indicating that a full error has occurred in the display control processing is displayed on the error display LED 374. Control the display.

  71 and 72 are flowcharts showing the error processing in step S757. In the error processing, the payout control CPU 371 first loads an error flag, and the error flag payout switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, a payout case error designation bit, a main control communication error designation bit, and a payout number abnormality error designation bit. The other error bits are reset (step S7701). Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the error flag is 0 (step S7702). If the value of the error flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S7710. If the value of the error flag is not 0 (that is, if the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, the withdrawal case error designation bit, the main control communication error designation bit, or the withdrawal number abnormality error designation bit is set) The control CPU 371 checks whether or not the operation signal is turned on from the error release switch 375 (step S7703). When the operation signal is turned on, the error recovery time is set in the pre-error recovery timer (step S7709). The error recovery time is the time from when the error release switch 375 is operated until the actual return from the error state to the normal state.

  If the operation signal from the error release switch 375 is not on, the value of the timer before error recovery is confirmed (step S7704). If the value of the timer before error recovery is 0, that is, if the timer before error recovery is not set, the process proceeds to step S7710. If the pre-error recovery timer is set, the value of the pre-error recovery timer is decremented by -1 (step S7705). If the pre-error recovery timer value becomes 0 (step S7706), the payout switch of the error flags is set. The abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, the payout case error designation bit, and the main control communication error designation bit are reset (step S7707), and if set, the re-payout waiting timer is reset (step S7708). Then, control goes to a step S7710. If the pre-error recovery timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step S7713.

  When the processing of step S7707 is executed, there may be an error bit that is not in the set state among the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, the payout case error designation bit, and the main control communication error designation bit. There is no problem even if the error bit that is not in the set state is reset. As described above, in this embodiment, when an error (see FIG. 70) that causes the setting of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, and the main control communication error bit occurs, an error occurs. The error is released when the release switch 375 is pressed.

  In step S7710, if set, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the re-payout waiting timer, and checks whether the re-payout wait timer after the subtraction has timed out (step S7711). If the re-payout waiting timer has timed out, the payout control CPU 371 resets the payout case error designation bit of the error flag (step S7712). Then, control goes to a step S7713.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the payout case error is detected and the payout detection error designation bit is set by executing the processes of steps S7707 and S7712, the error release switch 375 is pressed. On the condition that the error has been canceled (more precisely, the time before error recovery has passed) and on the condition that a predetermined time (2 minutes in this example) has passed after detection of the payout case error The error may be automatically canceled. In this embodiment, regarding the payout number abnormality error, once detected, it is not canceled unless the power supply to the gaming machine is reset.

  When the processing of steps S7707 and S7712 is executed and the payout case error designation bit is reset, the payout control code is “2” (corresponding to the execution of the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 67 to 69). Then, the game ball payout retry operation is started. That is, when the payout control process in step S755 is executed next, if the payout passing waiting process in step S7513 is executed, the repayout process is performed again. For example, if a prize ball payout process has been performed and the value of the unpaid-out number counter is not 0, the process proceeds from step S75305 to steps S75309 and S75310, and the payout case error designation bit is in the reset state in step S75310. Therefore, the process for starting the re-payout process after step S75314 is executed again, and the re-payout process is executed.

  As described above, the payout control means is used to pay out a game ball when the payout number count switch 301 detects no game ball even though the ball payout device 97 pays out a game ball. After performing the correct payout control for causing the ball payout device 97 to execute the retry operation for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) as a limit, the payout number count switch 301 has detected no game balls. When it is detected (see step S75314 and subsequent steps in FIGS. 67 to 69), the control state related to payout is shifted to an error state, and an error release signal is output from the error release switch 375 in the error state, or a payout case Corrected payout that makes correction payout control again on condition that a predetermined time (2 minutes in this example) has passed since the error was detected To run the control restart processing.

  Further, even during the re-payout process in the error state (specifically, during the re-payout process before setting the payout case error and during the re-payout process after the error release switch 375 is pressed), step S7501 shown in FIG. S7502 and S7506 are executed. That is, even when an error relating to payout occurs, if the game ball passes the payout number count switch 301, the value of the unpaid-off number counter is subtracted. Accordingly, the value of the unpaid-out number counter when returning from the error state is a value reflecting the number of game balls actually paid out. That is, even if an error related to payout occurs, the number of game balls actually paid out can be accurately managed.

  In addition, even when it is confirmed that a game ball has been paid out as a result of executing the re-payout process in the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the payout case error bit is not reset. The bit of the payout case error is reset only when the error release switch 375 is operated (specifically, when an error return time after operation has elapsed) or when a payout case error is detected for a predetermined time. (2 minutes in this example) has elapsed (steps S7707, S7712). That is, until a predetermined time (in this example, 2 minutes) has passed since the detection of the payout case error, the payout case error (insufficient payout) is automatically determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the payout number count switch 301. The error) state is not canceled, and the payout case error is not canceled without an artificial operation. Therefore, the game store clerk and the like can surely recognize that a shortage of payout has occurred. However, in this embodiment, at least a long time (2 minutes in this example) after the occurrence of the payout case error is configured to automatically cancel the payout case error so that the payout case error is generated. Prevents continued for longer than necessary.

  In some cases, a gaming machine may be configured such that a hardware reset (reset to the payout control CPU 371) is performed by operating the error release switch 375. However, when such a gaming machine is configured, When the error release switch 375 is operated, for example, the value of the unpaid number counter is also cleared. However, in this embodiment, since the payout control means is configured to perform the re-payout operation again by operating the error release switch 375, the payout process is executed reliably, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can not be given.

  In step S7713, the payout control CPU 371 checks the detection signal of the full switch 48. If the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is output (if it is in the ON state), the full tank error designation bit in the error flag is set (step S7714).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 (step S7715). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output (if it is on), the ball break error designation bit in the error flag is set (step S7716).

  Furthermore, the payout control CPU 371 checks the state of the connection signal from the main board 31 (step S7717), and if the connection signal is not output (if it is in the off state), sets the main board unconnected error designation bit. (Step S7718).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 among the switch timers in which the state of the detection signal of each switch is set, and the value is the switch on maximum time (for example, “ 250 ") (step S7719), the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 is set in the error flag (step S7720). It should be noted that the value of each switch timer is incremented by 1 when the state of the input port to which the detection signal of each switch is input is switched on in the input determination process of step S752, and cleared by 0 when it is off. Accordingly, the fact that the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 exceeds the switch on maximum time means that the payout number count switch 301 is in the on state exceeding the switch on maximum time. Then, it is determined that the game ball is clogged at the disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or at the portion of the payout number count switch 301.

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 loads the payout control state flag when the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 becomes a switch-on determination value (for example, “4”) (step S7721). In step S7722), it is confirmed whether the winning ball payout operation or the ball lending payout operation is in progress (step S7723). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a prize ball payout operation specifying bit or a ball lending payout operation specifying bit is set in the payout control state flag. If the designated bit during the winning ball payout operation and the designated bit during the ball lending payout operation are both in the reset state, the payout control CPU 371 determines that the game ball has passed the payout number count switch 301 even though the payout operation is not in progress, and an error flag. Among these, the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is set (step S7724).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the payout number abnormality counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000) (step S7725). If it is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000), the payout control CPU 371 determines that a payout number error has occurred and sets a payout number error error flag (step S7726).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 resets the prepaid card unit error flag for setting the error state of the prepaid card unit 50 (step S7727). Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the input state of the VL signal from the card unit 50 (step S7728), and if the VL signal is not input (if it is in the off state), the prepaid card unit error flag The prepaid card unit unconnected error designation bit is set (step S7729).

  In the display control process of step S760, the error display LED 374 performs notification by display (numerical display) according to the error flag and the error bit in the prepaid card unit error flag. Therefore, a communication error can be notified by the error display LED 374. Further, since the communication error is detected on the payout control means side, the communication error can be detected without increasing the burden on the game control means.

  In this embodiment, the main board unconnected error is automatically canceled when the connection signal is turned on (see steps S7701, S7717, and S7718), but the condition that the error cancel switch 375 is further operated is set. In addition, the error state may be eliminated.

  In this embodiment, a communication error is reported so as to be distinguishable from a communication error with the card unit 50 (a prepaid card unit unconnected error and a prepaid card unit communication error) and other errors (see FIG. 70). ). Therefore, a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is easily identified.

  In this embodiment, in the error processing, first of the error flags, other than the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, the payout case error designation bit, the main control communication error designation bit, and the withdrawal number abnormality error designation bit. After the bit is reset once (see step S7701), it is checked every time error processing is executed whether a full error, a ball break error, or a main control unconnected error has occurred. The payout switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, the payout case error designation bit, and the main control communication error designation bit are reset on the condition that the error release switch 375 has been operated. However, the payout number abnormality error is not canceled once it is set. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a payout number error occurs, the payout number error is canceled as a condition that the power supply is reset.

  73 and 74 are flowcharts showing the information output processing in step S759. In the information output process, the payout control CPU 371 first loads a payout control state flag (step S7901), and checks whether or not a ball lending payout operation is in progress (step S7902). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the designated bit during the ball lending payout operation of the payout control state flag is set. If the ball lending / dispensing operation is in progress, the process proceeds to step S7909. If the ball lending payout operation is not in progress, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout number count switch 301 is in the on state (step S7903). If the payout number count switch 301 is in the ON state (in this case, the payout by the winning ball is detected), the payout control CPU 371 adds 1 to the value of the winning ball signal 1 output number counter (step S7904). At the same time, the value of the prize ball payout number counter is incremented by 1 (step S7905). The prize ball signal 1 output number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the condition for outputting the prize ball signal 1 is satisfied. The prize ball payout number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls paid out by the prize ball payout.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the added prize ball payout counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined prize ball information output determination value (10 in this example) (step S7906). If it is equal to or greater than a predetermined prize ball information output determination value (10 in this example), the payout control CPU 371 resets the prize ball payout number counter (step S7907) and sets the value of the prize ball information output number counter. 1 is added (step S7908). The prize ball information output count counter is a counter for counting the number of times that the condition for outputting prize ball information is satisfied.

  Next, if it is set, the payout control CPU 371 decrements the prize ball information output timer by 1 (step S7909), and checks whether the prize ball information output timer after the subtraction has timed out (step S7910). The prize ball information output timer is a timer for measuring the output duration time of prize ball information. If not timed out, the process proceeds to step S7914. If time-out has occurred, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball information output number counter is 0 (step S7911). If the value of the prize ball information output number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S7915. If the value of the winning ball information output number counter is not 0 (that is, if the number of winning ball information output conditions is still satisfied), the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball information output number counter. (Step S7912). Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a prize ball information output timer in order to start outputting the next prize ball information (step S7913). Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to output the prize ball information to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S7914). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs a process of setting output data in a prize ball information output bit (bit 7, see FIG. 51) of the output port 1.

  Next, if the payout control CPU 371 is set, the prize ball signal 1 output timer is decremented by 1 (step S7915), and it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball signal 1 output timer after the subtraction has timed out (step S7916). ). The prize ball signal 1 output timer is a timer for measuring the output duration time of the prize ball signal 1. If not timed out, the process proceeds to step S7920. If time-out has occurred, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball signal 1 output number counter is 0 (step S7917). If the value of the winning ball signal 1 output number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S7921. If the value of the prize ball signal 1 output number counter is not 0 (that is, if the number of established conditions for the prize ball signal 1 still remains), the payout control CPU 371 determines the value of the prize ball signal 1 output number counter. 1 is subtracted (step S7918). Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a prize ball signal 1 output timer to start outputting the next prize ball signal 1 (step S7919). Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to output the prize ball signal 1 to the outside (step S7920). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for setting output data in the prize ball signal 1 output bit (bit 0; see FIG. 51) of the output port 0.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for setting output data in the gaming machine error state signal output bit (bit 1, see FIG. 51) of the output port 0 (step S7921), and loads an error flag (step S7922). ). If either the ball breakage error designation bit or the full tank error designation bit is set in the error flag (Y in steps S7923 and S7924), the gaming machine error status signal output bit of the output port 0 remains set. The process ends. In this case, the gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside based on the fact that the gaming machine error status signal output bit of the output port 0 is set in step S7921. On the other hand, if neither the ball breakage error designation bit nor the full tank error designation bit is set in the error flag, the payout control CPU 371 clears the gaming machine error state signal output bit of the output port 0 (step S7925), and processing Exit.

  By executing the above processing, in this embodiment, the prize ball signal 1 is output to the outside every time one prize ball payout is detected on the payout control means side. Further, prize ball information is output to the game control means side every time ten payout balls are detected on the payout control means side. Further, when a ball break error or a full tank error is detected on the payout control means side, a gaming machine error state signal is output to the outside.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101a) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101a starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) (step S781). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101a proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S782). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101a sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101a clears the flag (step S783) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101a first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S784).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101a performs effect control process processing (step S785). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S786). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S782.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing (step S784). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101a checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  FIG. 76 shows the processing in the case where a command indicating an error relating to payout control is received among the effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. Various effect control commands such as a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern and a display result specifying command indicating a display result indicating whether or not to win are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101a first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101a reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a frame state display command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101a sets a prize ball error bit (bit 0, see FIG. 25) among the lower 4 bits of the frame state display command. It is confirmed whether it has been done (step S615). If set, the effect control CPU 101a performs control to superimpose and display predetermined prize ball error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S616). For example, the effect control CPU 101 a performs control to display a character string such as “A prize ball error has occurred” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101a checks whether or not the full error bit (bit 1, see FIG. 25) in the lower 4 bits of the frame state display command is set (step S617). If set, the effect control CPU 101a performs control to superimpose and display predetermined full tank error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S618). For example, the effect control CPU 101 a performs control to display a character string such as “a full tank error has occurred” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101a checks whether or not the ball break error bit (bit 2, see FIG. 25) in the lower 4 bits of the frame state display command is set (step S619). If set, the effect control CPU 101a performs control to superimpose and display predetermined ball-out error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S620). For example, the effect control CPU 101 a performs control to display a character string such as “A ball break error has occurred” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101a checks whether or not the payout number abnormality error bit (bit 3; see FIG. 25) of the lower 4 bits of the frame state display command is set (step S621). If set, the effect control CPU 101a performs control to superimpose and display predetermined payout number abnormality error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S622). For example, the effect control CPU 101 a performs control to display a character string such as “A payout number error has occurred” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball shortage error command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101a performs control to superimpose and display predetermined prize ball shortage error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S623). S624). For example, the effect control CPU 101 a performs control to display a character string such as “There was a shortage of prize balls” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball excess error command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101a performs control to superimpose and display predetermined prize ball excess error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S625). S626). For example, the effect control CPU 101 a performs control to display a character string such as “There was an excessive prize ball error” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  In addition, each error display may not be simply displayed in a superimposed manner, but may be prioritized and notified of an error having a high priority by ranking from the viewpoint of fraud importance. For example, a payout number abnormality error may be preferentially notified with the highest priority, or a newly generated error may be preferentially notified when an error state changes.

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101a sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S627). Then, control goes to a step S611. For example, when a variation pattern command or a display result designation command is received, the effect control CPU 101a also performs processing for storing the received variation pattern command or display result designation command in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM. Do.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S785) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101a performs one of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): When the big hit is reached, after the variation time is over, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of a special prize opening or a designation command after opening a special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S806).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer and the 560 payout control microcomputer 370 transmit and receive control commands by serial communication. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a connection confirmation command for confirming the communication connection state with the payout control microcomputer 370 every time a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses. To 370. The payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560 based on the reception of the connection confirmation command. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 370 is connected in such a manner that the game control microcomputer 560 can recognize the control state (in this example, a prize ball error, a full tank error, a ball shortage error, and a payout number error error). The command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. With such a configuration, by using a serial communication method, it is possible to facilitate wiring between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370. In addition, the control state signal (response signal to which the control state is added) is transmitted by placing the control state on the connection OK command that the payout control microcomputer 370 periodically outputs based on the reception of the connection confirmation command. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control state signal from being missed without considering the output timing of the control state signal, and the communication between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is reliably performed. be able to. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 can recognize the control state of the payout control microcomputer 370 without complicating the control. In this embodiment, the cycle (interval) for transmitting the connection confirmation command is 1 second, but it may be 0.5 seconds or the like.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the serial communication circuit 505 communicates with the payout control microcomputer 370 (for example, various errors such as noise error, overrun error, break code detection, framing error, parity error, etc.). A status register A for setting the occurrence status). Then, the value of the predetermined bit of the status register A is changed when an abnormality of the received data is detected, and when the value of the predetermined bit of the status register A is changed, the received data is discarded. In addition, even when the game control microcomputer 560 discards the received data, the game control microcomputer 560 issues a new connection confirmation command based on the determination that a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, and the payout control microcomputer 370. Send to. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in communication between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370, communication is performed more than necessary while preventing processing from being executed based on erroneous data. Inconvenience due to stagnation can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 resets a predetermined period (1 second in this example) to the prize ball process timer when the execution of the payout control is finished, and the prize ball process. Measurement control by the timer is started (see step S52505). If the number of prize balls is not stored (specifically, if no prize ball command output counter has a count value of 1 or more in step S52301), the game control microcomputer 560 resets the game. A new connection confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 based on the time-out of the prize ball process timer. For this reason, an interval period can be provided between the end of execution of payout control and the transmission of a new connection confirmation command. Can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a winning ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 370 based on the detection of a winning regardless of the transmission timing of the connection confirmation command. To do. Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball number reception command based on the reception of the prize ball number command, and receives a prize ball preparation command during execution of the payout control. The signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560 every signal output period (1 second in this example). In this case, the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the prize ball in such a manner that the game control microcomputer 560 can recognize the control state (in this example, a prize ball error, a full tank error, an out of ball error, and a payout number error error). The preparing command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the reception of the prize ball number reception command. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden of the game control microcomputer 560 by not performing connection control command transmission control unnecessarily during execution of payout control. Even when the payout control is being executed, the control state signal can be output by adding the control state to the award ball preparation command, so that the game control microcomputer 560 can recognize the control state. it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 receives the award ball end command and then stores the number of award balls (specifically, the prize ball command output counter in step S52301). If the count value is 1 or more), a new prize ball number command is immediately transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 regardless of the transmission of the connection confirmation command. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the execution process of the payout control.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 60 determines whether a predetermined error (in this example, a prize ball error, a full tank error, a full ball error, etc.) based on the control state indicated by the received connection OK command. , And a payout quantity abnormality error). Then, the game control microcomputer 60 transmits a prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 370 on the condition that it is determined that a predetermined error has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of sending a prize ball number command when the payout control cannot be normally performed due to an error state. In particular, in this embodiment, since the RAM provided in the payout control microcomputer 370 is not backed up by the backup power supply, if a prize ball number command is transmitted when there is an abnormality in the payout control, the power is reset. For example, the memorized number of prize balls may be lost, which may cause a great disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, when there is an abnormality in the payout control, the prize ball number command is transmitted while the memory of the prize ball number is retained on the game control microcomputer 560 side backed up by the backup power source. It is possible to prevent such a disadvantage from occurring by controlling to hold.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 increases the time interval for transmitting the connection confirmation command when the connection OK command cannot be received after transmitting the connection confirmation command. Whenever a specific period (10 seconds in this example) elapses, the control is switched to the connection confirmation command transmission. Therefore, in a state where the communication state between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is unstable, the connection confirmation command transmission process is performed by extending the interval period until the connection confirmation command is transmitted. Can be performed less frequently, and a wasteful processing load can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 causes the game when a predetermined error (in this example, a prize ball error, a full tank error, a ball runout error, and a payout number error) occurs. Information that allows the control microcomputer 560 to recognize a predetermined error is set by changing a specific bit of the connection OK command, and the connection OK command in which the setting has been made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a frame state display command in which information capable of recognizing a predetermined error set in the received connection OK command is set as it is to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, based on the reception of the frame state display command, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the production device (the production display device 9 in this example) to notify that a predetermined error has occurred. Do. Therefore, it is possible to notify that a predetermined error has occurred using the effect device, and to reduce the processing load on the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 has a payout excess exceeding the number of unpaid game balls to be paid out and the number of unpaid games to be paid out. The number of shortage payouts that did not reach the ball is cumulatively counted using a payout number abnormality counter. When the value of the payout number abnormality counter becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (2000 in this example), the payout control is stopped and the payout stop state is controlled. Therefore, instead of judging each payout control, the payout control is executed by comprehensively judging the payout control executed under an abnormal condition based on the value of the payout number abnormality counter counted up cumulatively. Can be stopped. Accordingly, it is possible to more accurately prevent an act of illegally paying out the game ball. That is, a payout error that may occur due to an illegal act can be recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side, and an appropriate process for the payout error can be made possible, so that measures against the illegal act can be strengthened. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 counts up the value of the payout number abnormality counter when a payout shortage number equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (2 in this example) occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the execution of the payout control is stopped more than necessary. In other words, since there are not a few small numbers (1 in this example) of insufficient payouts in the operating state of the gaming machine, the number of insufficient payouts exceeding the predetermined reference number (2 in this example) has occurred. By counting up on the condition, it is possible to prevent the execution of the payout control from being stopped more than necessary.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes re-payout control for driving and controlling the ball payout device 97 to pay out only one game ball when a payout shortage occurs. . If the payout of the game ball is not detected even after the re-payout control is executed, the value of the payout number abnormality counter is counted up. Therefore, even if the number of payout shortages is small, it is possible to appropriately stop the execution of payout control by reflecting it in the count value of the payout number abnormality counter, and to take illegal measures to prevent the act of illegally paying out game balls. Can be strengthened.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the payout number abnormality error is detected and controlled to the payout stop state, the payout stop state is canceled on condition that the power supply of the gaming machine is reset. Therefore, in order to release the payout stop state, the game store clerk must confirm the abnormal state and then perform the release operation. Therefore, the payout stop state is canceled illegally and the game is continued in the abnormal state. This can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the RAM 55 provided in the gaming control microcomputer 560 can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period by the backup power supply even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to be in the payout stop state, the game control microcomputer 560 prohibits the transmission of the winning ball number command even if a winning occurs. For this reason, the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 55 (specifically, the value of the prize ball command output counter) is cleared even though the payout is stopped due to an abnormality caused by the gaming machine side that is not caused by fraud. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 adds the prize ball number to the prize ball number counter at the timing of sending the prize ball number command, and receives the prize ball information based on the received prize ball information. Subtract 10 from the value of the ball counter. Then, based on the fact that the value of the prize ball number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined prize ball shortage determination value (501 in this example), it is determined that there is a prize ball shortage error. Based on the fact that it is less than the determination value (0 in this example), it is determined that there is an excessive prize ball error. Therefore, the abnormal state can be detected by both the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370. Accordingly, it is possible to further strengthen the fraud countermeasure that prevents the act of illegally paying out the game ball. Further, it is possible to effectively prevent an illegal act caused by interfering with communication between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a connection signal indicating a connection state of communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output port 57. Since the payout control microcomputer 370 can confirm the communication connection state at any timing, the payout of the prize ball is performed when the communication connection state is abnormal. This can be surely prevented.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 normally transmits a connection confirmation command 1 second after the connection OK command is received, and when a communication error occurs (for example, connection When the OK command cannot be received), the connection confirmation command is transmitted 10 seconds after the connection confirmation command is transmitted, and the period of 1 second or 10 seconds is measured by a timer (a counter configured by software). However, the connection confirmation command may be transmitted by an internal interrupt that occurs when the counter updated as hardware by the internal clock reaches a predetermined value (1 second or 10 seconds). In that case, the counter may be cleared by reception of the connection OK command, or the counter may be cleared if an internal interrupt is generated with a predetermined value.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the pachinko machine is applied as the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described. However, the parrot machine can also be applied as the gaming machine according to the present invention. In this case, by applying the configuration shown in the above embodiment, the number of game balls taken in or returned from the parrot machine is cumulatively counted up to a counter, and the counter value is a predetermined abnormality determination value (for example, 2000) or more, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the number of game balls taken in or returned, and the take-in operation or return operation may be controlled to be stopped. It is also possible to apply a slot machine as a gaming machine according to the present invention. In this case, by applying the configuration shown in the above embodiment, the number of medals paid out from the hopper tank in the slot machine is cumulatively counted up to a counter, and the counter value is a predetermined abnormality determination value (for example, 2000). ) If this is the case, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the number of medals paid out, and the medal payout operation from the hopper tank may be controlled to be stopped.

  For example, when applied to a slot machine or parrot machine, when a medal or game ball return operation is performed, an excessive return number or an unpaid number of returns may be counted up cumulatively. Further, for example, when applied to a hopper tank of a slot machine, the excessive number of medals and the number of unpaid medals may be counted up cumulatively. Furthermore, for example, when applied to a parrot machine, the number of excessive game balls taken or the number of insufficient game balls taken in is counted up for the purpose of detecting abnormal operation of the gaming machine, not as fraud. You may make it do.

  An embodiment of the slot machine will be described below with reference to the drawings (FIGS. 78 and 79). As shown in FIG. 78, the slot machine 601 of the present embodiment (modified example) includes a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open, a front door pivotally supported on a side end of the housing, It is composed of

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 601 of the present embodiment, reels 602L, 602C, and 602R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 78, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 603 provided on the front door.

  For example, “red 7 (outline 7 in the figure)”, “BAR”, “replay”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell” can be distinguished from each other on the outer periphery of the reels 602L, 602C, 602R. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn 21 in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are displayed on the perspective window 603 in upper, middle, and lower three stages, respectively.

  The reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 632L, 632C, and 632R (see FIG. 79), so that the symbols of the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are continuously provided in the see-through window 603. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R, three continuous symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 603 as display results.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion unit 604 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout outlet 609 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 605 that is operated when setting the bet number of the bet, and using a credit, a specified number of bet numbers determined according to the game state within the range (in this embodiment, in the normal game state, “ 3 ”, MAXBET switch 606 operated when setting“ 1 ”for the regular bonus), medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled (for setting the credit and bet number) A payout switch 610 operated when the medal used is returned), a start switch 607 operated when starting the game, Le 602L, 602C, stop switch 608L is operated to stop each rotation of the 602R, 608C, 608R are provided.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 611 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 612 and a payout indicator 613 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BETLED 614 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BETLED 615 that notifies that the bet number is set is 2 and lit that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 616 to be notified by, lighting request LED 617 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, start valid LED 618 to notify that the game start operation by operating the start switch 607 is effective, weight (previous game) (Waiting to start reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 619 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED during replay 620 to notify that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 606, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 621 (see FIG. 79) for notifying that the setting operation of the betting number by the operation of the single BET switch 605 and the MAXBET switch 606 is valid. In the stop switches 608L, 608C, 608R, the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 622L, 622C, 622R that notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 608L, 608C, 608R is valid are turned on. (See FIG. 79).

  A liquid crystal display 651 capable of displaying an effect image or the like related to a game is provided at the upper center position inside the front door, and a display image displayed on the display screen through a liquid crystal display window 670 disposed in front of the liquid crystal display 651. Can be visually recognized. Further, on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display 651, two movable actors 675L and 675R for performing effects related to the game are respectively arranged, and are arranged in front of the left and right movable actors 675L and 675R. As described above, the internal movable accessory 675L and 675R can be seen through from the production perspective windows 671L and 671R made of a transparent panel provided on the front door.

  Further, between the left and right movable combination objects 675L and 675R and the production perspective windows 671L and 671R, there is a concealment state in which the left and right movable combinations 675L and 675R are hidden from the production perspective windows 671L and 671R so that they cannot be seen through. , Endless shutter sheets constituting two shutter devices (not shown) that can be changed to a non-hidden state in which the left and right movable accessories 675L and 675R can be seen through the production perspective windows 671L and 671R are arranged. It is installed.

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 623 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state and a stop state excluding a RAM abnormality error by a predetermined key operation, changing a set value or checking a set value Set value display 624 for displaying the set value at that time, and the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 604, the hopper tank (not shown) side provided inside the housing or the medal payout outlet 609 side A flow path switching solenoid 630 for selectively switching to any one of the above, a insertion medal sensor 631 for detecting a medal that has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 604 and flowed down to the hopper tank side is provided.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) including reel sensors 633 capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the reels 602L, 602C, 602R, reel motors 632L, 632C, 632R, and reels 602L, 602C, 602R, respectively. , A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 604, a hopper motor 634 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout outlet 609, and the hopper motor 634 being paid out. A payout sensor 635 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front face of the power supply box, a stop switch 636 for selecting enable / disable of a stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of the big bonus (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed), An automatic checkout switch 629 for selecting whether the automatic checkout function is valid / invalid for controlling automatic checkout processing (processing for adjusting (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of the big bonus, Setting key switch 637 for switching to the setting change mode at startup, functioning as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in normal times, and winning probability of internal lottery in the setting change mode A reset / setting switch 638 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of (delay rate) Power switch 639 is operated to ON / OFF the power is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 601 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 604, or credits are used to set the number of bets. In order to use the credit, the single BET switch 605 or the MAX BET switch 606 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 78) become valid, and the operation of the start switch 607 is valid, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, as the specified number of bets, three are determined in the normal gaming state, and one is determined in the regular bonus. If medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  When the start switch (also referred to as a lever) 607 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R continuously change. When any one of the stop switches 608L, 608C, and 608R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 602L, 602C, and 602R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 603.

  Then, when all the reels 602L, 602C and 602R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout exit 609 (see FIG. 78). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. The Rukoto. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 602L, 602C, 602R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 601. 79, the slot machine 601 includes a game control board 640 (corresponding to the game control board (main board) 31 of FIG. 4), an effect control board 690 (corresponding to the effect control board 80 of FIG. 4), a power source The board 600 is provided, the gaming state is controlled by the game control board 640, the presentation according to the gaming state is controlled by the presentation control board 690, and the power supply board 600 is used to drive electric power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 601. Generated and supplied to each unit.

  The game control board 640 is connected to the one-sheet BET switch 605, the MAXBET switch 606, the start switch 607, the stop switches 608L, 608C, and 608R, the checkout switch 610, the reset switch 623, the insertion medal sensor 631, and the reel sensor 633. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 635, stop switch 636, automatic settlement switch 629, setting key switch 637, and reset / setting switch 638 are connected via the power supply board 600, and detection of these connected switches is detected. A signal is input.

  The game control board 640 includes the credit display 611, the game auxiliary display 612, the payout display 613, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 614 to 616, the insertion request LED 617, the start valid LED 618, the waiting LED 619, the replaying LED 620, and the BET. A switch valid LED 621, left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 622L, 622C, and 622R, a set value display 624, a flow path switching solenoid 630, and reel motors 632L, 632C, and 632R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 600. The hopper motor 634 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 641 (corresponding to the game control microcomputer 560 of FIG. 4) described later mounted on the game control board 640. Like That.

  The game control board 640 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 641a, ROM 641b, RAM 641c, and I / O port 641d. Random number generation circuit 642 for generating, sampling circuit 643 for obtaining random numbers from the random number generation circuit, detection signals input from switches such as sensors and switches connected directly to game control board 640 or via power supply board 600 Switch detection circuit 644, a motor drive circuit 645 that controls the drive of the reel motors 632L, 632C, and 632R, a solenoid drive circuit 646 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 630, various displays connected to the game control board 640, LED drive circuit for LED drive control 47. The power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 601 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power drop detection circuit 648 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 641, A reset circuit 649 for providing a reset signal to the CPU 641a when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 641a, and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 641a transmits various commands to the effect control board 690 via the I / O port 641d. A command transmitted from the game control board 640 to the effect control board 690 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 690 to the game control board 640. A transmission line for commands transmitted from the game control board 640 to the effect control board 690 includes a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 680. The game control board 640 and the effect control board 690 are not directly connected.

  On the effect control board 690, a liquid crystal display 651 (see FIG. 78) disposed on the front door of the slot machine 601, an effect LED 652, speakers 653 and 654, a reel LED 655, a shutter motor 810, a shutter sensor 811, and a movable object Electrical components such as the LED 881, the movable object motor 805, and the movable object sensor 829 are connected, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 691 mounted on the effect control board 690. It is like that.

  The effect control board 690 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 691a, a ROM 691b, a RAM 691c, and an I / O port 691d in the same manner as the main control part 641, and includes a sub-control part 691 for effect control and an effect control board 690. A liquid crystal drive circuit 692 that controls the drive of the connected liquid crystal display 651, an effect effect LED 652, a reel LED 655, an LED drive circuit 693 that controls the drive of the movable object LED 881, and a sound that controls audio output from the speakers 653 and 654. Output circuit 694, detection signal input from switches such as a reset circuit 695 that provides a reset signal to the CPU 691a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 691a, a shutter sensor 811, a movable object sensor 829, and switches Detect the switch The CPU 691a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 640, and is mounted with a motor driving circuit 697 for controlling the driving of the H detection circuit 696, the shutter motor 810, and the movable object motor 805. In addition to performing various controls for performing effects, each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 690 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Next, the internal lottery process executed by the main control unit 641 will be described. At the timing when the start switch 607 is turned on, the sampling circuit 643 acquires (extracts) a numerical value (random number) counted by the random number generation circuit 642. The sampling circuit 643 outputs the numerical value acquired as a random number to the CPU 641a in the main control unit 641.

  The CPU 641a in the main control unit 641 uses the numerical value acquired from the sampling circuit 643 and the determination value set for each combination (small combination, replay combination, special combination, etc.) in the internal lottery table stored in the ROM 641b. By comparing, it is determined whether or not a small role / replaying role / special role is won. Further, as a table for internal lottery, a plurality of tables are provided so that the medal payout rate changes according to the set value / game state (normal game state, regular bonus). For example, in the internal lottery table, a plurality of judgment values are set for each of a small combination (cherry, bell), a re-playing combination (replay), a special combination (regular bonus, big bonus), and a loss. Further, for example, when “1” to “6” are provided as setting values that can be set by the reset / setting switch 638, the determination value is assigned so that the medal payout rate changes as the setting value number increases. Table is used. In addition, when the gaming state is a normal gaming state, a table in which a judgment value is assigned to each of the roles and outliers so that any of the small roles, replaying roles, and special roles can be won is used. In the case of a regular bonus, a table in which judgment values are assigned to the small role and the offside so that only the small role can be won (a table in which no judgment value is assigned to the replaying role / special role) is used. . The setting of the determination value in the above table is an example, and the determination value is not limited to such setting. In this embodiment, the number of bets can be set by the player only “3” in the normal gaming state and “1” in the regular bonus, but either of the normal gaming state or the regular bonus can be set. Even in the gaming state, any one of “1” to “3” can be set by the player as the bet number. A plurality of internal lottery tables having different winning probabilities for replaying and special roles may be prepared, and internal lottery may be performed using tables corresponding to the number of bets.

  As described above, in the slot machine 601 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery is determined according to the set value.

  In the slot machine 601 of the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set is determined according to the gaming state as described above, and the prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, there are a regular bonus and a normal gaming state as the gaming state. Among these, 1 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus, and the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the normal gaming state is as follows. 3 is defined. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the betting number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the game is started when the betting number is set to 3. Can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 601 of this embodiment, when all the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are stopped, the winning line that has been activated (in this embodiment, all the winning lines are always activated. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the game state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and the winning flag of the combination must be set in the RAM 641c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combination permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes. As described above, in the slot machine 601 according to the present invention, when it is determined by the prize predetermining means that the generation of the specific prize is permitted and the specific prize display result is not derived to the prize variable display section, There is a carry-over means for carrying over the decision to allow the generation of a prize from the next game. In such a configuration, even when the specific winning display result is not derived to the winning variable display section, the decision to allow the occurrence of the specific winning is carried over from the next game onward, It is possible to prevent loss to the player.

  As a combination in the slot machine 601, a big bonus and a regular bonus are defined as a special combination, cherry and bell are defined as a small combination, and replay is defined as a re-playing combination. In addition, as a combination of combinations in the slot machine 601, big bonus + cherry and regular bonus + cherry are determined. That is, the total of the combination of the combination and combination is 7.

  In the slot machine 601 of the present embodiment, the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a regular bonus. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it depends on whether any special role is being carried over (whether any special role has already been set in the winning flag of the special role). The combination of combinations and combinations that are subject to lottery are also different. In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object is determined according to this state number. It becomes possible to specify. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “1” is set as the state number, and “2” is set as the state number in the case of a regular bonus.

  When the gaming state is a normal gaming state and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, a big bonus, a regular bonus, a big bonus + cherry, a regular bonus + Cherry, replay, cherry, bell, that is, all combinations and combinations of combinations are subject to internal lottery. In addition, when the game state is the normal game state and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “1”, a combination of replay, cherry, bell combination and combination Is subject to internal lottery. Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “2” is set as the state number, the combination of cherry and bell and combinations of combinations are targeted for internal lottery.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on one of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and two medals are paid out in the normal gaming state. 15 medals are paid out. If the “Cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5. Since you won the cherry on the winning line, 4 medals will be paid out in the normal gaming state, but in the regular bonus, even if you win the cherry on the 2 winning lines, one game Since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out at 15 is set to 15, only 15 medals are paid out. A bell is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is placed on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and in the normal gaming state, 8 medals are paid out. 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When a replay is won, the medals will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets no longer required to be set in the next game (the regular bonus will not be replayed and will always be 3) This is substantially the same as when three corresponding medals are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 641c.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. When transitioning to the big bonus, the transition to the regular bonus is performed at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. Controlled by regular bonus. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus exceeds 465. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the gaming state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 641c.

  The regular bonus and the big bonus described above may be collectively referred to simply as “bonus”.

  78, only the symbol 7 is drawn on the reels 601L, 601C, and 601R in FIG. 78. However, the illustration is omitted, and the reels 601L, 601C, and 601R are actually also surrounded by dotted lines. The design is drawn.

  In the slot machine 601 of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a small role, a re-playing role or a special role (bonus) is won in the internal lottery (a small role, a re-playing role or a special role is won by winning the internal lottery). Suggestive effects suggesting that there is a possibility that the winning flag is set in the RAM 641c) on the stage members (liquid display 651, movable right and left movable parts 675L, 675R, etc. of the liquid crystal display 651). To be executed. In particular, based on the fact that it is determined that the special combination is allowed to be generated by the internal lottery process (a state in which the internal lottery is won and the special combination winning flag is set in the RAM 641c), the CPU 691a displays the liquid crystal display. The suggestion effect is executed so that a specific display result (for example, “7,7,7” is provided) is obtained as a combination of the left, middle, and right symbols Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen of the device 651. To do.

  Note that the gaming state advantageous to the player is not limited to the above big bonus and regular bonus, but for example, a notification target winning that occurs on condition that reel deriving conditions (for example, stop order or stop timing) are satisfied. When a stop switch 606L, 606C, or 606R is operated by limiting a game state (so-called assist time (AT)) in which an operation procedure that satisfies a derivation condition is notified or at least one of the reels is retracted. Control the displayed symbols to be easy to stop, and the challenge time (CT) that allows the player to derive a combination of winning symbols by pushing forward, specific winnings (for example, replay winnings and singles) Gaming state (so-called replay time (RT) Middle state), and further, a game state (for example, ART that combines assist time and replay time) may be mounted, and the suggestion producing means establishes a transition condition for shifting to these game states. The suggestion effect may be performed so that a specific display result is obtained based on what is being performed.

  Further, the type of specific display result may be different depending on the type of gaming state where the transition condition is satisfied. (For example, “7 ・ 7 ・ 7” or “3 ・ 3 ・ 3” is based on the fact that the big bonus was won as a special role in the internal lottery, and the regular bonus was won as a special role in the internal lottery. “3.3.3” is prepared, and “1.1.1.1” is prepared based on the fact that the transition condition for shifting to the replay time (RT) is satisfied.)

  In the example of the gaming machine shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the control microcomputer is realized by the main control unit 641 mounted on the game control board 640. The payout means is realized by a hopper driven by a hopper motor 634. Further, the game control medium payout control means is realized by executing processing for controlling the hopper motor 634 by the main control unit 641. The cumulative update means is realized by the main control unit 641 executing a process of cumulatively adding a payout excess or payout deficiency to a counter. Also, the payout stopping means is realized by being controlled by the main control unit 641 so as not to operate the hopper motor 634. As shown in the example of the gaming machine shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in a slot machine or the like, a game control process for controlling the progress of the game is executed by the main control unit 641 mounted on the game control board 640. At the same time, the hopper motor 634 is controlled to perform payout control. Therefore, in the example of the gaming machine shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the game control microcomputer is realized by the main control unit 641, and the payout control microcomputer is also realized by the main control unit 641.

  In addition, in embodiment shown above, the characteristic structure of the gaming machine as shown to the following (1)-(24) is also shown.

(1) A gaming machine can use a game medium (for example, a game ball) to allow a player to play a predetermined game, and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins a winning opening) A gaming machine that pays out game media based on a game control microcomputer that controls the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), and a payout means that pays out game media (for example, , A ball payout device 97) and a payout control microcomputer (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370) for controlling the payout means. The game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer are connected by serial communication. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 are connected to each other. Each of the serial communication circuits 505 and 380 is built in and the payout control command shown in FIG. 24 is transmitted and received by serial communication), and the game control microcomputer determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed. A connection confirmation signal (for example, a connection confirmation command) for confirming a communication connection state between the predetermined period determination means (for example, the part for executing step S52313 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the payout control microcomputer. The connection confirmation signal output means for outputting to the payout control microcomputer every time it is determined by the predetermined time period determination means that the predetermined time period has elapsed (for example, after the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S52313, step S5211). And the predetermined payout conditions Payout number data (for example, prize balls) that can specify the number of prize game media (for example, the number of prize balls) as prizes to be paid out based on the establishment (for example, that the game balls have won a prize opening) The number of prize game media to be paid out is specified based on the number-of-payout storage means (for example, a prize ball command output counter) that stores the command output counter) and the number-of-payout data stored in the number-of-payout storage means. A payout number signal output means for outputting a possible payout number signal (for example, a prize ball number command) to the payout control microcomputer (for example, a part for executing step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560), and a payout number signal output. The output of the connection confirmation signal by the connection confirmation signal output means is stopped based on the output of the number-of-payout signal by the means. Stop means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, after the prize ball number command is transmitted in step S52305 of the prize ball transmission process 2, the prize ball is received without moving to the prize ball transmission process 1 for transmitting the connection confirmation command. A part for stopping transmission of the connection confirmation command by shifting to the confirmation process (see step S52306). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of transmitting a connection confirmation command only in the prize ball transmission process 1 shown in FIG. 39 (see step S5211), and shifts after the prize ball number command is transmitted, as shown in FIG. In the ball receipt confirmation process, a process for transmitting a connection confirmation command is not performed. The payout control microcomputer outputs a response signal (for example, a connection OK command) to the game control microcomputer based on the input of the connection confirmation signal output from the connection confirmation signal output means. The number of unpaid premium game media specified by the payout number signal output by the signal output means (for example, the part for executing steps S7415 and S74208 in the payout control microcomputer 370) and the payout number signal output means is paid out. Game medium payout control means for executing payout control for driving and paying out the means (for example, the payout motor 289 is activated by executing the processing in step S75113 in the payout control microcomputer 370, and the payout motor control in step S756) Processing part), and a response signal output The means outputs a response signal to the game control microcomputer in such a manner that the game control microcomputer can recognize the control state (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes the processes of steps S7414 and S74207, As shown in FIG. 25, a prize ball error, a full tank error, a ball shortage error, a payout quantity error error are set in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command and transmitted), and the game control microcomputer further executes payout control. When the process is finished, the number-of-payout data determination means for determining whether or not the number-of-payout data is stored in the number-of-payout storage means (for example, it is determined as Y in step S52503 in the game control microcomputer 560 and step S52504 is executed). Step S52 when the process proceeds to the prize ball transmission process 2 The payout number signal output means stores the payout number data in the payout number storage means when the payout number data determination means determines that the payout number data is stored in the payout number storage means. Based on the stored payout number data, a new payout number signal is output to the payout control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S52305 based on the determination of Y in step S52301). A new prize ball number command), and the connection confirmation signal output means determines the predetermined period when the payout number data determination means determines that no payout number data is stored in the payout number storage means. Based on the determination that the predetermined period has passed, a new connection confirmation signal is output to the dispensing control microcomputer. (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines N in step S52301, then becomes Y in step S52313, shifts to prize ball transmission processing 1, and executes step S5211 to transmit a new connection confirmation command. You may put it configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the wiring of the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer by using the serial communication method. In addition, a control state signal (a response signal to which a control state is added) can be output by adding a control state to a response signal periodically output by the payout control microcomputer based on the input of the connection confirmation signal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control state signal from being missed without considering the output timing of the control state signal, and to reliably perform communication between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer. it can.

(2) The predetermined period determining means determines whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed using a measurement timer (for example, a prize ball process timer) for measuring the predetermined period (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, after setting the connection confirmation time 1 (1 second) to the prize ball process timer in step S5226, the processing of step S52313 is executed.) When the game control microcomputer finishes executing the payout control, the measurement timer Measurement timer start means for resetting a predetermined period to start measurement control by the measurement timer (for example, the connection confirmation time 1 (1 second) is set in the award ball process timer in step S52505 in the game control microcomputer 560) Thereafter, the process proceeds to the prize ball transmission process 2 and the measurement of step S52313 is started). The signal output means is based on the fact that the measurement timer reset by the measurement timer starting means has timed out when it is determined by the payout number data determination means that the payout number data is not stored in the payout number storage means. A new connection confirmation signal is output to the payout control microcomputer (for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 becomes Y in step S52313, the process shifts to prize ball transmission processing 1 and executes step S5211). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, an interval period can be provided between the end of execution of payout control and the output of a new connection confirmation signal, and processing at the end of execution of payout control is concentrated and new It is possible to prevent the connection confirmation signal from being lost.

(3) The payout number signal output means outputs a payout number signal to the payout control microcomputer based on the fact that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied regardless of the output timing of the connection confirmation signal by the connection confirmation signal output means. (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S52305 when Y in step S52301 regardless of the transmission timing of the connection confirmation command), and the game medium payout control means outputs the payout number signal output means. The payout control is started based on the input of the payout number signal (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 determines the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command in steps S74214 and S74319 as the unpaid number). Set to the counter, and the value of the unpaid-out number counter is 0 in step S75109. The payout motor 289 is activated based on the fact that the payout motor 289 is activated), and the payout control microcomputer inputs the payout number signal output from the payout number signal output means. A reception signal output means for outputting a reception signal (for example, a prize ball number reception command) indicating that a number signal has been input to the game control microcomputer (for example, a part for executing steps S74215 and S74320 in the payout control microcomputer 370) ) And a payout signal (for example, a prize ball preparation command) indicating that the payout control is being executed during execution of the payout control for each predetermined payout signal output period (for example, 1 second). Payout signal output means for outputting to the microcomputer for use (for example, a microcomputer for payout control) A portion for executing steps S74222, S74313, and S74413 in 370) and, when the execution of the payout control is finished, a payout end signal (for example, a prize ball end command) indicating that the payout control is finished. A payout end signal output means (for example, a part for executing step S74417 in the payout control microcomputer 370), and the payout signal output means is capable of recognizing the control state by the game control microcomputer. The payout-in-progress signal is output to the game control microcomputer (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes the processing of steps S74221, S74312, and S74412 to show the lower part of the command for preparing a prize ball as shown in FIG. 4 bit prize ball error and full tank The stop means outputs the connection confirmation signal from the connection confirmation signal output means based on the reception signal output from the reception signal output means. (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S52405 without moving to the prize ball transmission process 1 for transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the determination of Y in step S52403, and ends the prize ball. The measurement timer starting means resets a predetermined period in the measurement timer and starts measurement control by the measurement timer based on the output of the payout end signal by the payout end signal output means. (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that Y is determined in step S52503. After setting the connection confirmation time 1 (1 second) prize balls process timer at step S52505, starts measuring step S52313 goes to prize balls transmission process 2) it may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden of the game control microcomputer by not performing the output control of the connection confirmation signal during the payout control. Even when the payout control is being executed, the control state signal can be output by adding the control state to the paying-in signal, so that the control state can be recognized on the game control microcomputer side.

(4) The game control microcomputer uses error determination means (for example, game control) to determine whether or not a predetermined error has occurred based on the control state indicated by the response signal output by the response signal output means. The payout number signal output means uses the payout number signal for payout control on condition that the error determination means determines that a predetermined error has not occurred. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to output to the microcomputer (for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S52302, it executes step S52305 and transmits a prize ball number command). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of outputting a payout number signal when the payout control cannot be normally performed due to an error state.

(5) The payout number signal output means inputs the payout end signal output by the payout end signal output means, and then determines that the payout number data is stored in the payout number storage means by the payout number data determination means. Sometimes, regardless of the determination by the error determination means, a new payout number signal is output to the payout control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S52503 and award ball transmission process 2). After shifting to, based on the determination of Y in step S52301, the process of step S52305 may be executed to transmit a winning ball number command). According to such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the execution process of the payout control.

(6) The game control microcomputer is a specific period determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that determines whether or not a specific period (for example, connection confirmation time 2 (10 seconds)) longer than a predetermined period has elapsed. 560, step S5213 is executed based on the connection confirmation time 2 (10 seconds) set in the prize ball process timer) and whether or not a response signal is input after outputting the connection confirmation signal. Including a response signal determination means for determining (for example, a part of step S5223 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the connection confirmation signal output means determines that the response signal is not input by the response signal determination means. , Each time the connection confirmation signal is determined by the specific period determination means that the specific period has passed, Switch to control to be output to the microcomputer (for example, if the game control microcomputer 560 does not determine Y in step S5223, it proceeds to the award ball transmission processing 1 based on the determination in step S5227 as Y). (S5211 may be executed). According to such a configuration, when the communication state between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer is unstable, the connection check is performed by extending the interval period until the connection check signal is output. It is possible to reduce the frequency of wasteful execution of signal output processing and reduce the wasteful processing load.

(7) The gaming machine includes an effect control microcomputer (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling a predetermined effect device (for example, the effect display device 9), and the response signal output means has a predetermined error. When this occurs, information that allows the game control microcomputer to recognize the predetermined error is set by changing a specific bit of the response signal (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 is configured as shown in FIG. 25). In addition, by setting bit 0 to bit 3 of the connection OK command, a prize ball error, a full tank error, a ball shortage error, and a payout number error error are set), and the response signal thus set is sent to the game control micro (For example, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs the information to steps S7414 and S7. 207 is executed to execute steps S7515 and S74208), the game control microcomputer can recognize the predetermined error set in the response signal when the response signal output by the response signal output means is input. Informing error signal output means for outputting to the effect control microcomputer a notification error signal (for example, a frame state display command) in which various information is set as it is (for example, a part for executing step S398 in the game control microcomputer 560). The effect control microcomputer controls the effect device to notify that a predetermined error has occurred based on the input of the notification error signal (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100). When it is determined as Y in step S614 Step S616, S618, S620, it may be configured so as to include a portion) to perform S622. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that a predetermined error has occurred using the rendering device, and to reduce the processing burden on the game control microcomputer.

(8) The gaming machine allows a player to play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins a winning opening) A gaming machine that pays out game media based on a game control microcomputer that controls the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), and a payout means that pays out game media (for example, , A ball payout device 97) and a payout control microcomputer (for example, payout control microcomputer 370) for controlling the payout means, and the game control microcomputer is satisfied that a payout condition for the game is satisfied (eg, The number of prize game media (for example, the number of prize balls) can be specified as a prize to be paid Payout number storage means (for example, a prize ball command output counter) for storing a payout number data (for example, a count value of a prize ball command output counter) and a payout number data stored in the payout number storage means. A payout number signal output means (for example, step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560 is executed) that outputs a payout number signal (for example, a prize ball number command) that can specify the number of prize game media to be output to the payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer at least controls the payout means to control the payout means for the number of unpaid prize game media specified by the payout number signal output by the payout number signal output means. Game medium payout control means for executing payout control (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370) In step S75113, the payout motor 289 is started and the payout motor control process in step S756 is executed), and at least the payout excess and the payout number exceeding the number specified by the payout number signal. Cumulative update means (for example, step S7503 in the payout control microcomputer 370) that cumulatively updates data (for example, the count value of the payout number abnormality counter) indicating the number of shortage payouts that is less than the number specified by the signal. When the data updated by the cumulative update means and the data updated by the cumulative update means become a specific value (for example, a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value (for example, 2000)), payout by the game medium payout control means Dispensing stop means for controlling the execution to the payout stop state by stopping execution of the control (for example, , After setting the payout number abnormality error designation bit in steps S7505, S75322, and S7726 in the payout control microcomputer 370, the control is made so that the payout operation is not performed by determining N in step S75101). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, instead of judging each payout control, the payout control is executed by comprehensively judging the payout control executed under abnormal conditions based on the cumulatively updated data. Can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately prevent the act of illegally paying out game media.

(9) The cumulative update means updates the data when an excessive number of payouts or an insufficient payout number equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (for example, 2) occurs (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 determines Y in step S75319). Step S75320 may be executed when the determination is made). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the execution of the payout control is stopped more than necessary.

(10) The payout control microcomputer performs re-payout control means (for example, payout control) for performing re-payout control for driving out the payout means and paying out only one game medium when an insufficient payout number occurs. The cumulative updating means updates the data when no payout of the game medium is detected even if the re-payout control by the re-payout control means is executed, including a portion of steps S75314 to S75333 in the microcomputer 370. (For example, the part which performs step S75325, S75335 in the payout control microcomputer 370) may be configured. According to such a configuration, even when the number of payout shortages is small, the execution of payout control can be stopped appropriately by reflecting it in the data, and more fraud countermeasures can be implemented to prevent the act of illegally paying out game media. Can be strengthened.

(11) When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming machine cancels the payout stop state (for example, in the payout control microcomputer 370, in the payout control microcomputer 370, steps S7701 and S7707 in FIG. As shown, the part that prevents the payout number abnormality error from being canceled unless the power supply reset of the gaming machine is performed by not performing reset processing on the payout number abnormality error designation bit in the error flag) It may be configured to include. According to such a configuration, in order to release the payout stop state, the game store clerk must confirm the abnormal state and then perform the release operation. Therefore, the payout stop state is canceled illegally and remains in the abnormal state. It is possible to prevent the game from being continued.

(12) The gaming machine is provided with a backup power supply (for example, a backup power supply created on a power supply board) that can supply power to the gaming control microcomputer only for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. The number storage means can retain the stored contents by a backup power source for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, the RAM 55 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is partially or entirely a power supply board). When the game control microcomputer is controlled in the payout stop state, the payout number signal output means outputs the payout number signal even if the payout condition for the game is satisfied. Payout number signal prohibiting means (for example, a game control microcomputer 56) May be configured so as to include a portion) that controls not to execute the processing in step S52305 when it is determined that N in step S52302 in. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the number-of-payout data is cleared even though the payout is stopped due to an abnormality caused by the gaming machine side that does not depend on fraud. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring.

(13) The gaming machine includes an effect control microcomputer (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) that controls a predetermined effect device (for example, the effect display device 9), and the payout control microcomputer is a payout stop means. When the payout stop state is controlled by, an error signal indicating that a predetermined error has occurred (for example, a connection OK command in which error information is set or a winning ball preparation command) is output to the game control microcomputer. Error signal output means (for example, in the payout control microcomputer 370, as shown in FIG. 25, by setting bit 0 to bit 3 of the connection OK command or the winning ball preparation command, a winning ball error, full tank error, A ball breakage error and a payout quantity abnormality error are set, and steps S7415 and S7 are performed. 208, S74222, S74313, SS74413), and the game control microcomputer is used to notify that a predetermined error has occurred when an error signal is output by the error signal output means. Including a notification error signal output means for outputting an error signal (for example, a frame state display command) to the effect control microcomputer (for example, a part for executing step S398 in the game control microcomputer 560); Is based on the fact that the error signal for notification is input and controls the effect device to notify that a predetermined error has occurred (for example, it is determined as Y in step S614 in the effect control microcomputer 100). Sometimes steps S616, S 18, S620, may be configured so as to include a portion) to perform S622. According to such a structure, it can alert | report that the predetermined | prescribed error generate | occur | produced using a production | presentation apparatus, and can recognize that abnormality had generate | occur | produced with respect to the game store clerk.

(14) The gaming machine allows a player to play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, a ball rental request has been made) ), A payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out the game medium, and a control microcomputer for controlling the payout means (for example, a payout control microcomputer) 370), and the control microcomputer executes a payout control for executing payout control for driving and paying out payout means for at least unpaid out game media based on establishment of a payout condition based on the loan request. Means (for example, the processing of step S75113 in the payout control microcomputer 370 is executed, the payout motor 289 is activated, and the step Data indicating the payout motor control processing in step S756), at least an excessive payout amount exceeding the requested loan amount and an insufficient payout amount less than the requested loan amount (for example, the number of payouts) Cumulative update means for cumulatively updating (count value of the abnormality counter) (for example, a part for executing steps S7503, S75320, S75325, and S75335 in the payout control microcomputer 370) and data updated by the cumulative update means are specified. When a value (for example, a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value (for example, 2000)) is reached, a payout stop unit (for example, for payout control) that stops execution of the payout control by the game medium payout control unit and controls the payout stop state. In steps S7505, S75322, and S7726 in the microcomputer 370 After setting the number abnormal error specified bit output, it is determined that N and portions) for controlling so as not to perform the dispensing operation in step S75101, may be configured to include. According to such a configuration, instead of judging each payout control, the payout control is executed by comprehensively judging the payout control executed under abnormal conditions based on the cumulatively updated data. Can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately prevent the act of illegally paying out game media.

(15) The gaming machine allows a player to play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins a winning opening) A game machine which pays out game media based on a ball lending request), a payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out game media, and a control for controlling the payout means A control microcomputer (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370), and the control microcomputer executes payout control for driving out payout means for paying out unpaid game media based on the establishment of payout conditions. Game medium payout control means (for example, the process of step S75113 in the payout control microcomputer 370 is executed to start the payout motor 289, and The portion where the payout motor control process of step S756 is executed), the payout excess exceeding the number of unpaid game media to be paid out, and the number of payout shortages that did not satisfy the number of unpaid game media to be paid out And cumulative update means (for example, a part for executing steps S7503, S75320, S75325, and S75335 in the payout control microcomputer 370) that cumulatively updates data indicating the count (for example, the count value of the payout number abnormality counter), and cumulative When the data updated by the updating means reaches a specific value (for example, a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value (for example, 2000)), the execution of the payout control by the game medium payout control means is stopped to control the payout stop state. Dispensing stop means (for example, steps S7505 and S7 in the dispensing control microcomputer 370) 322, after setting the payout number abnormal error bits specified in S7726, it is determined that N and portions) for controlling so as not to perform the dispensing operation in step S75101, may be configured to include. According to such a configuration, instead of judging each payout control, the payout control is executed by comprehensively judging the payout control executed under abnormal conditions based on the cumulatively updated data. Can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately prevent the act of illegally paying out game media.

(16) The gaming machine can play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins a winning opening) A gaming machine that pays out game media based on a game control microcomputer that controls the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), and a payout means that pays out game media (for example, , A ball payout device 97), a payout control microcomputer for controlling the payout means (for example, payout control microcomputer 370), and fulfillment of payout conditions by the game (for example, the game ball has won a winning opening) A payout detection that detects payout of a prize game medium as a base prize (for example, prize ball payout) and outputs a detection signal to a microcomputer for payout control Means (for example, the number-of-payout counting switch 301), and the game control microcomputer should pay out based on the fact that a payout condition for the game has been established (for example, a game ball has won a winning opening). A payout number storage means (for example, a prize ball command output counter) for storing payout number data (for example, a count value of a prize ball command output counter) capable of specifying the number of prize game media (for example, the number of prize balls), and a payout Based on the number-of-payout data stored in the number storage means, a number-of-payout signal that outputs a number-of-payout signal (for example, a prize ball number command) that can specify the number of prize game media to be paid out is output to the payout control microcomputer. Means (for example, a part for executing step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a payout number signal are output. Update means for updating the first data (for example, the count value of the prize ball number counter) indicating the number of prize game media to be paid out (for example, a part for executing step S52308 in the game control microcomputer 560). And the payout control microcomputer receives the detection signal from the payout detection means for a predetermined number of times (for example, a prize ball information output determination value (10 times)) to the game control microcomputer. Counting signal output means (for example, a part executing step S7914 in the payout control microcomputer 370) for outputting a game medium count signal (for example, prize ball information) indicating detection of payout of prize game media, and at least payout Number of unpaid premiums specified by the number-of-payout signal output by the number signal output means Game medium payout control means for executing payout control for driving the payout means to pay out game media (for example, the process of step S75113 in the payout control microcomputer 370 is executed to start the payout motor 289, and step S756). The payout motor control process is executed), and at least a second payout number exceeding the number specified by the payout number signal and a second payout shortage not exceeding the number specified by the payout number signal. Cumulative update means for cumulatively updating data (for example, the count value of the payout number abnormality counter) (for example, a portion for executing steps S7503, S75320, S75325, and S75335 in the payout control microcomputer 370) and cumulative update means The updated second data is a specific value (for example, a predetermined payout number abnormality) When the error determination value (for example, 2000) is reached, the payout stop means (for example, steps S7505 and S75322 in the payout control microcomputer 370) stops execution of the payout control by the game medium payout control means and controls the payout stop state. The game control microcomputer further includes a counting signal output means, and sets the payout number abnormality error designation bit in S7726, and then determines that N is determined in step S75101 so as not to perform the payout operation. Based on the output of the game medium count signal by the reverse update means for updating the first data in the reverse direction (for example, the part for executing step S5311 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first data is predetermined. Threshold value (for example, prize ball shortage determination value (501)). An abnormal state determination means (for example, a part that executes steps S52309 and S5312 in the game control microcomputer 560) that determines that the abnormal state is based on the fact that the award ball excess determination value (0) is reached. It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, instead of determining each payout control, payout control is performed by comprehensively determining payout control executed under an abnormal situation based on the cumulatively updated second data. Execution can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately prevent the act of illegally paying out game media. Further, since the game control microcomputer side can also determine the abnormal state based on the first data, both the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer can detect the abnormal state. Accordingly, it is possible to further strengthen the fraud countermeasure that prevents the act of illegally paying out the game medium.

(17) The gaming machine allows a player to play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins a winning opening) A gaming machine that pays out game media based on a ball lending request), a game control microcomputer that controls the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), and a game A payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out a medium, a payout control microcomputer (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370) for controlling the payout means, and a game payout condition is satisfied (eg, a game ball) (For example, prize ball payout) and fulfillment of a payout condition by a loan request (for example, a prize ball) A payout detecting means (for example, a payout number count switch 301) which detects a payout of a rental game medium based on a ball lending request (for example, a ball lending payout) and outputs a detection signal to a payout control microcomputer. And the game control microcomputer is configured to count the number of prize game media to be paid out (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that a game payout condition has been established (for example, a game ball has won a prize opening). The number of payouts that can be specified (for example, the count value of the prize ball command output counter) (for example, the prize ball command output counter) and the number of payouts stored in the number of payouts storage Based on this, a payout number signal (for example, a prize ball number command) that can specify the number of prize game media to be paid out is a microcomputer for payout control. A payout number signal output means for outputting to the computer (for example, a part for executing step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a first number indicating the number of prize game media to be paid out at the timing when the payout number signal is output. Update means for updating data (for example, the count value of the prize ball number counter) (for example, a part for executing step S52308 in the game control microcomputer 560), the payout control microcomputer from the payout detection means Payout determination means for determining whether the input detection signal is a payout of a prize game medium or a rental game medium (for example, a part for executing steps S7902 and S7903 in the payout control microcomputer 370), and a payout determination The detection signal is paid by the means A game medium count signal (detection of game medium payout to the game control microcomputer based on the determination of a predetermined number of times (e.g., award ball information output determination value (10 times)). For example, count signal output means for outputting prize ball information (for example, a part for executing step S7914 in the payout control microcomputer 370) and the number specified by the payout number signal output by the payout number signal output means. Game medium payout control means (for example, payout control) for executing payout control for driving out payout means for paying out a predetermined number of loaned game media based on fulfillment of payout conditions based on a loan request or unpaid premium game media The processing of step S75113 in the microcomputer 370 is executed, the payout motor 289 is activated, and the step 756 payout motor control process is executed), the number specified by the payout number signal or the number of payouts exceeding the predetermined number, and the number specified by the payout number signal or the number of payout shortages not satisfying the predetermined number Second update data (for example, a count value of a payout number abnormality counter) that cumulatively updates (for example, a portion that executes steps S7503, S75320, S75325, and S75335 in the payout control microcomputer 370); When the second data updated by the cumulative update means reaches a specific value (for example, a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value (for example, 2000)), the execution of the payout control by the game medium payout control means is stopped to stop payout. Dispensing stop means for controlling the state (for example, step S75 in the dispensing control microcomputer 370) The game control microcomputer further includes: a portion for controlling to not perform a payout operation by determining N in step S75101 after the payout number abnormality error designation bit is set in 5, S75322, S7726. On the basis of the output of the game medium count signal by the count signal output means, reverse update means for updating the first data in the reverse direction (for example, a part for executing step S5311 in the game control microcomputer 560), One data is a predetermined threshold (for example, a prize ball shortage determination value (501)). An abnormal state determination means (for example, a part that executes steps S52309 and S5312 in the game control microcomputer 560) that determines that the abnormal state is based on the fact that the award ball excess determination value (0) is reached. It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, instead of determining each payout control, payout control is performed by comprehensively determining payout control executed under an abnormal situation based on the cumulatively updated second data. Execution can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately prevent the act of illegally paying out game media. Further, since the game control microcomputer side can also determine the abnormal state based on the first data, both the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer can detect the abnormal state. Accordingly, it is possible to further strengthen the fraud countermeasure that prevents the act of illegally paying out the game medium.

(18) The gaming machine can play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins a winning opening) A gaming machine that pays out game media based on a game control microcomputer that controls the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), and a payout means that pays out game media (for example, , A ball payout device 97) and a payout control microcomputer (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370) for controlling the payout means. The game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer are connected by serial communication. Input / output signals (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 Each of the serial communication circuits 505 and 380 is incorporated, and the payout control command shown in FIG. 24 is transmitted and received by serial communication). The game control microcomputer determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed. A connection confirmation signal (for example, a connection confirmation command) for confirming a communication connection state between the predetermined period determination means for determining (for example, the portion of step S52313 in the game control microcomputer 560 that executes step S52313) and the payout control microcomputer. Is output to the payout control microcomputer every time it is determined by the predetermined period determination means that the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S52313, the step Part to execute S5211) and pay by game Based on the fact that the condition is satisfied (for example, that a game ball has won a prize opening), the number of payout data (for example, the number of prize balls) as the prize to be paid out (for example, the number of prize balls) (for example, The number of prize game media to be paid out based on the number-of-payout storage means (for example, the prize-ball command output counter) for storing the prize ball command output counter) and the number-of-payout data stored in the number-of-payout storage means Payout number signal output means for outputting a payout number signal (for example, a prize ball number command) that can be specified to the payout control microcomputer (for example, a part for executing step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560). The payout control microcomputer responds based on the input of the connection confirmation signal output from the connection confirmation signal output means. Response signal output means for outputting a signal (for example, connection OK command) to the game control microcomputer (for example, a part for executing steps S7415 and S74208 in the payout control microcomputer 370) and at least a payout number signal output means Game medium payout control means (for example, step in the payout control microcomputer 370) that executes payout control for driving the payout means to pay out the number of unpaid premium game media specified by the output payout number signal. The process of S75113 is executed to start the payout motor 289, and the payout motor control process of step S756 is executed), and at least the payout excess and the payout number signal exceeding the number specified by the payout number signal Data indicating the number of underpayments that did not reach the specified number (for example, Cumulative update means for cumulatively updating the count value of the payout number abnormality counter) (for example, the portion of steps S7503, S75320, S75325, and S75335 in the payout control microcomputer 370) and the data updated by the cumulative update means Becomes a specific value (for example, a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value (for example, 2000)), a payout stop unit (for example, a payout) that stops execution of the payout control by the game medium payout control unit and controls the payout stop state. The control microcomputer 370 sets a payout number abnormality error designation bit in steps S7505, S75322, and S7726, and then determines that N is determined in step S75101 so as not to perform a payout operation). The output means is a game control microphone. A response signal is output to the game control microcomputer in such a manner that the computer can recognize the control state (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes the processes of steps S7414 and S74207 to connect as shown in FIG. (The award ball error, full tank error, out of ball error, and payout number error error may be set and transmitted in the lower 4 bits of the OK command). According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the wiring of the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer by using the serial communication method. In addition, a control state signal (a response signal to which a control state is added) can be output by adding a control state to a response signal periodically output by the payout control microcomputer based on the input of the connection confirmation signal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control state signal from being missed without considering the output timing of the control state signal, and to reliably perform communication between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer. it can. Furthermore, instead of determining each payout control, the payout control executed under an abnormal condition can be comprehensively determined based on the cumulatively updated data, and the payout control can be stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to more accurately prevent the act of illegally paying out game media.

(19) The game control microcomputer stops the output of the connection confirmation signal by the connection confirmation signal output means based on the output of the payout number signal by the payout number signal output means (for example, for game control When the execution of the payout control is terminated, the payout amount data is stored in the payout amount storage means when the microcomputer 560 finishes executing the payout control. The number-of-payout data determination means for determining whether or not is stored (for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S52503 and step S52504 is executed to move to the prize ball transmission process 2). The payout number signal output means includes a payout number data determination means. When it is determined that the payout number data is stored in the payout number storage means, a new payout number signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer based on the payout number data stored in the payout number storage means. (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S52305 based on the determination of Y in step S52301 and transmits a new prize ball number command), and the connection confirmation signal output means outputs the number of payouts. When it is determined by the data determining means that the payout number data is not stored in the payout number storage means, a new connection confirmation signal is issued based on the predetermined period determining means determining that the predetermined period has elapsed. The information is output to the control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs step S52301 It moves to prize balls transmission process 1 becomes Y in step S52313 after determining that N, then executes step S5211 and transmits the new connection confirmation command) may also be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing at the end of the execution of the payout control from being concentrated and the occurrence of a new connection confirmation signal to be missed, thereby speeding up the execution processing of the payout control. be able to.

(20) The gaming machine detects a payout of a prize game medium as a prize (for example, a prize ball payout) based on the establishment of a payout condition by a game (for example, a game ball has won a prize opening) and is used for payout control The microcomputer includes a payout detection means (for example, a payout number count switch 301) for outputting a detection signal to the microcomputer, and the game control microcomputer indicates the number of prize game media to be paid out at the timing when the payout number signal is output. Including update means (for example, a part for executing step S52308 in the game control microcomputer 560) for updating the medium number data (for example, the count value of the prize ball number counter), the payout control microcomputer from the payout detection means The detection signal is input a predetermined number of times (for example, prize ball information output determination value (10 times)). Then, a counting signal output means (for example, step S7914 in the payout control microcomputer 370) that outputs a game medium count signal (for example, prize ball information) indicating detection of payout of the prize game medium to the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer further includes reverse update means for updating the medium number data in the reverse direction based on the output of the game medium count signal by the count signal output means. For example, the part for executing step S5311 in the game control microcomputer 560 and the medium number data have reached a predetermined threshold value (for example, a shortage determination value (501) for a shortage of winning balls). Based on the abnormal state determination means for determining the abnormal state (for example, a game control microcomputer A portion) for performing the steps S52309, S5312 in Yuta 560, may be configured to include. According to such a configuration, since the abnormal state can be determined on the game control microcomputer side based on the medium number data, the abnormal state can be detected by both the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer. it can. Accordingly, it is possible to further strengthen the fraud countermeasure that prevents the act of illegally paying out the game medium.

(21) The gaming machine allows a player to play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, a ball rental request has been made) ) Based on the game control microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) and the payout means for paying out the game medium (for example, a ball). A payout device 97) and a payout control microcomputer (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370) for controlling the payout means, and the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer send a signal by serial communication. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 are respectively Serial communication circuits 505 and 380 are built in and the payout control command shown in FIG. 24 is transmitted and received by serial communication), and the game control microcomputer determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed. A connection confirmation signal (for example, a connection confirmation command) for confirming the communication connection state between the period determining means (for example, the part for executing step S52313 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the payout control microcomputer is predetermined. Connection confirmation signal output means that outputs to the payout control microcomputer every time the period determination means determines that the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S5211 after determining Y in step S52313) Part) and for payout control The microcomputer uses response signal output means (for example, for payout control) that outputs a response signal (for example, connection OK command) to the game control microcomputer based on the input of the connection confirmation signal output by the connection confirmation signal output means. A part for executing steps S7415 and S74208 in the microcomputer 370) and a game medium for executing payout control for driving and paying out a predetermined number of rental game media based on establishment of a payout condition based on a loan request by driving the payout means The payout control means (for example, the part where the payout motor 289 is started by executing the process of step S75113 in the payout control microcomputer 370 and the payout motor control process of step S756 is executed) and at least a predetermined number Overdue and the predetermined number is not met Cumulative update means (for example, steps S7503, S75320, S75325, and S75335 in the payout control microcomputer 370 are executed to cumulatively update data indicating the number of payout shortages (for example, the count value of the payout number abnormality counter). Portion) and the data updated by the cumulative update means become a specific value (for example, a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value (for example, 2000)), the execution of the payout control by the game medium payout control means is stopped and paid out. The payout stopping means for controlling the stop state (for example, after setting the payout number error error designation bit in steps S7505, S75322, and S7726 in the payout control microcomputer 370, it is determined as N in step S75101 and the payout operation is not performed. Control part), and The answer signal output means outputs a response signal to the game control microcomputer in a manner in which the game control microcomputer can recognize the control state, and is controlled to the payout stop state when controlled to the payout stop state. A response signal is output to the game control microcomputer so that it can be recognized (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes the processing of steps S7414 and S74207, and as shown in FIG. 4) Set the award ball error, full tank error, out-of-ball error, and payout error error to 4 bits, and the game control microcomputer will further send a response signal that can recognize that the payout stop state has been controlled. Based on the input, payout is performed to notify that the payout is stopped. It is configured to include stop notification control means (for example, a part that causes the control microcomputer to perform error notification by executing step S398 in the game control microcomputer 560 and transmitting a frame state display command). May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the wiring of the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer by using the serial communication method. In addition, a control state signal (a response signal to which a control state is added) can be output by adding a control state to a response signal periodically output by the payout control microcomputer based on the input of the connection confirmation signal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control state signal from being missed without considering the output timing of the control state signal, and to reliably perform communication between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer. it can. Further, instead of determining each payout control, it is possible to stop the payout control by comprehensively determining the payout control executed under an abnormal condition based on the cumulatively updated data. . Therefore, it is possible to more accurately prevent the act of illegally paying out game media. Furthermore, it is possible to notify that the payout has been stopped, and to allow the game store clerk to recognize that an abnormality has occurred.

(22) The game control microcomputer, based on the fact that the game payout condition is satisfied, payout number data (for example, the number of prize balls) as the prize to be paid out (for example, the number of prize balls) (for example, The number of prize game media to be paid out based on the number-of-payout storage means (for example, the prize-ball command output counter) for storing the prize ball command output counter) and the number-of-payout data stored in the number-of-payout storage means The number-of-payout signal (for example, a part for executing step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560) for outputting a number-of-payout signal (for example, a prize ball number command) to the payout control microcomputer, and the number of payouts Based on the output of the payout number signal by the signal output means, the connection confirmation signal output means confirms the connection. Stop means for stopping signal output (for example, a portion that shifts to a prize ball end confirmation process without shifting to a prize ball transmission process 1 for transmitting a connection confirmation command in the game control microcomputer 560) and execution of payout control When the game is finished, the number-of-payout data determination means for determining whether or not the number-of-payout data is stored in the number-of-payout storage means (for example, it is determined as Y in step S52503 in the game control microcomputer 560, and step S52504 is executed). The payout number signal output means stores the payout number data in the payout number storage means by the payout number data determination means. Is determined based on the payout amount data stored in the payout amount storage means. Is output to the payout control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S52305 based on the determination of Y in step S52301 and transmits a new prize ball number command) to confirm the connection. The signal output means is based on the fact that the predetermined period determining means determines that the predetermined period has elapsed when the payout number data determining means determines that the payout number storage means does not store the payout number data. A new connection confirmation signal is output to the payout control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines “N” in step S52301, then becomes “Y” in step S52313, and proceeds to the award ball transmission process 1.) (S5211 is executed and a new connection confirmation command is transmitted) It may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing at the end of the execution of the payout control from being concentrated and the occurrence of a new connection confirmation signal to be missed, thereby speeding up the execution processing of the payout control. be able to.

(23) The gaming machine pays out a prize game medium as a prize (for example, pays out a prize ball) based on the establishment of a game payout condition (for example, a game ball has won a prize opening) and a payout condition for a lending request A payout detection means (for example, a payout) that detects a payout of a rental game medium (for example, a ballrent payout) based on the establishment of (for example, a ball lending request) and outputs a detection signal to the payout control microcomputer The game control microcomputer is provided with a number count switch 301), and at the timing when a payout number signal is output, medium number data (for example, a count value of a prize ball number counter) indicating the number of premium game media to be paid out is provided. An update means for updating (for example, a part for executing step S52308 in the game control microcomputer 560) and paying out The control microcomputer determines whether the detection signal input from the payout detection means is a payout game medium or a rented game medium. The payout determination means (for example, steps S7902, S7903 in the payout control microcomputer 370). And a game control micro based on that the detection signal is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, a prize ball information output determination value (10 times)) by the payout determination means. Counting signal output means (for example, a part for executing step S7914 in the payout control microcomputer 370) for outputting a game medium count signal (for example, prize ball information) indicating detection of game medium payout to the computer; In addition, the game control microcomputer further includes a counting signal. Based on the output of the game medium count signal by the output means, reverse update means for updating the medium number data in the reverse direction (for example, the part for executing step S5311 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the medium number data Is an abnormal state determination means (for example, a game control micro) that determines an abnormal state based on a predetermined threshold value (for example, a shortage determination value (501) for a prize ball, a determination value (0) for a prize ball excess)). And a portion for executing steps S52309 and S5312 in the computer 560). According to such a configuration, since the abnormal state can be determined on the game control microcomputer side based on the medium number data, the abnormal state can be detected by both the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer. it can. Accordingly, it is possible to further strengthen the fraud countermeasure that prevents the act of illegally paying out the game medium.

(24) The gaming machine can play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins a winning opening) A gaming machine that pays out game media based on a ball lending request), a game control microcomputer that controls the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), and a game A payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out a medium and a payout control microcomputer (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370) for controlling the payout means are provided, and the game control microcomputer and the payout control are provided. The microcomputer for input / output of signals by serial communication (for example, a game control microcomputer 560 and a payout control microphone) The computer 370 includes serial communication circuits 505 and 380, respectively, and sends and receives the payout control command shown in FIG. 24 by serial communication.) Whether the game control microcomputer has passed a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) A connection confirmation signal (for example, connection) for confirming a communication connection state between the predetermined period determination means for determining whether or not (for example, the portion of step S52313 in the game control microcomputer 560 that executes step S52313) and the payout control microcomputer The connection confirmation signal output means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S52313) to output a confirmation command) to the payout control microcomputer every time the predetermined period determination means determines that the predetermined period has elapsed. Step S5211 is executed after The number of prize game media as prizes to be paid out (for example, the number of prize balls) based on the fact that the game payout condition has been established (for example, a game ball has won a prize opening) Based on payout number storage means (for example, a prize ball command output counter) for storing possible payout number data (for example, a count value of a prize ball command output counter) and payout number data stored in the payout number storage means, A payout number signal output means (for example, step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560) that outputs a payout number signal (for example, a prize ball number command) that can specify the number of prize game media to be paid out to the payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer inputs the connection confirmation signal output from the connection confirmation signal output means. A response signal output means for outputting a response signal (for example, connection OK command) to the game control microcomputer based on the input (for example, a portion for executing steps S7415 and S74208 in the payout control microcomputer 370); Game for executing payout control for driving out payout means to drive out a predetermined number of rental game media based on the number specified by the payout number signal output by the number signal output means or establishment of the payout condition by the loan request The medium payout control means (for example, the portion where the payout motor 289 is started by executing the process of step S75113 in the payout control microcomputer 370 and the payout motor control process of step S756 is executed) and the payout number signal are specified. Or the number of payouts exceeding the specified number and the payout number signal Cumulative update means (for example, step S7503 in the payout control microcomputer 370) that cumulatively updates data indicating the predetermined number or the number of shortage payouts that did not satisfy the predetermined number (for example, the count value of the payout number abnormality counter). , S75320, S75325, S75335) and the data updated by the cumulative update means become a specific value (for example, a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value (for example, 2000)), the game medium payout control means Discharge stop means for stopping the execution of the payout control to control the payout stop state (for example, after setting the payout quantity abnormality error designation bit at steps S7505, S75322, and S7726 in the payout control microcomputer 370, N is set at step S75101. Judgment and do not perform payout operation The response signal output means outputs a response signal to the game control microcomputer in a manner that allows the game control microcomputer to recognize the control state (for example, a payout control microcomputer). 370 executes the processing of steps S7414 and S74207, and transmits a prize ball error, a full tank error, a ball out error, and a payout number error error in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command as shown in FIG. It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the wiring of the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer by using the serial communication method. In addition, a control state signal (a response signal to which a control state is added) can be output by adding a control state to a response signal periodically output by the payout control microcomputer based on the input of the connection confirmation signal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control state signal from being missed without considering the output timing of the control state signal, and to reliably perform communication between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer. it can. Furthermore, instead of determining each payout control, the payout control executed under an abnormal condition can be comprehensively determined based on the cumulatively updated data, and the payout control can be stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to more accurately prevent the act of illegally paying out game media.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, and in particular to gaming machines that perform serial communication between a gaming control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer using a serial communication circuit. It can be suitably applied.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 9 Production display device 14 Start winning opening 15 Variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
37 Dispensing control board 56 CPU
80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101a Production control CPU
101b Serial communication circuit (production control side)
370 Microcomputer for payout control 371 CPU for payout control
380 Serial communication circuit (withdrawal control side)
505 Serial communication circuit (game control side)
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which a player can play a game using a game medium, and can be given a value based on a predetermined grant condition,
A game control microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game;
And a grant control microcomputer for controlling the grant of value,
The game control microcomputer is:
Request signal output means for outputting a request signal to the application control microcomputer;
A grant amount storage means for storing grant amount data capable of specifying an amount of value to be granted based on the establishment of the predetermined grant condition;
A grant amount output means for outputting a signal capable of specifying the amount of value to be given to the grant control microcomputer based on the grant amount data stored in the grant amount storage means;
The giving control microcomputer is:
Response signal output means for outputting a response signal to the gaming control microcomputer based on the input of the request signal output by the request signal output means;
Based on the signal output by the given amount output means, the giving control means for giving the value of the amount specified by the signal;
An abnormality determining means for determining whether there is an insufficient grant abnormality that is insufficient with respect to the amount of value to which the assigned value is to be granted and whether an excessive grant abnormality in which the assigned value is excessive; Including
The response signal output means outputs data that allows the game control microcomputer to recognize the predetermined error when a predetermined error occurs including a case where the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred. , set by varying the predetermined bit of the response signal, the gaming machine according to claim including that an error signal output means for outputting the response signal to which the setting has been made to the game control microcomputer.

Images